WO2016121631A1

WO2016121631A1 - Terminal device and base station device

Info

Publication number: WO2016121631A1
Application number: PCT/JP2016/051789
Authority: WO
Inventors: 林　貴志; 翔一鈴木; 寿之示沢; 直紀草島; 渉大内
Original assignee: シャープ株式会社
Priority date: 2015-01-28
Filing date: 2016-01-22
Publication date: 2016-08-04
Also published as: JP2018041991A

Abstract

A terminal device, wherein whether data received through the first physical downlink shared channel is a retransmission of data received through the second physical downlink shared channel or not is based on a prescribed field of the first physical downlink control channel.

Description

Terminal device and base station device

The present invention relates to a terminal device and a base station device.
This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2015-014414 filed in Japan on January 28, 2015, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

The wireless access method and wireless network for cellular mobile communications (hereinafter referred to as “Long Term Evolution (LTE)” or “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access: EUTRA”) is the third generation partnership project 3GPP). In LTE, a base station device (base station) is also called eNodeB (evolvedvolveNodeB), and a terminal device (mobile station, mobile station device, terminal) is also called UE (User Equipment). LTE is a cellular communication system in which a plurality of areas covered by a base station apparatus are arranged in a cell shape. A single base station apparatus may manage a plurality of cells.

LTE supports frequency division duplex (Frequency Division Duplex: FDD) and time division duplex (Time Division Duplex: TDD). LTE adopting the FDD method is also referred to as FD-LTE or LTE FDD. TDD is a technology that enables full-duplex communication in at least two frequency bands by frequency division multiplexing an uplink signal and a downlink signal. LTE employing the TDD scheme is also referred to as TD-LTE or LTE TDD. TDD is a technology that enables full-duplex communication in a single frequency band by time-division multiplexing uplink signals and downlink signals. Details of FD-LTE and TD-LTE are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1.

Also, the base station apparatus can transmit a reference signal (RS; also referred to as Reference Signal) that is a known signal between the base station apparatus and the terminal apparatus to the terminal apparatus. This reference signal can transmit multiple reference signals for various purposes such as signal and channel demodulation and channel state reporting. For example, the cell-specific reference signal is transmitted in all downlink subframes as a cell-specific reference signal. Also, for example, the terminal-specific reference signal is transmitted as a reference signal specific to the terminal apparatus in a resource to which a data signal for the terminal apparatus is mapped. Details of the reference signal are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1.

In 3GPP, introduction of small cells is considered. A small cell is a generic term for a cell having a small transmission power of a base station apparatus constituting the cell and having a smaller coverage than a conventional cell (macro cell). For example, by applying small cells in a high frequency band, it is possible to arrange small cells with high density, and there is an effect of improving the frequency utilization efficiency per area. In consideration of introduction of a small cell, a technique for switching a base station apparatus to a stopped state is being studied for various purposes such as low power consumption and inter-cell interference reduction. Details are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 2.

3GPP will consider the use of unlicensed bands (unlicensed bands). By enabling LTE-based communication in the unlicensed band and performing cell aggregation in the license band cell (LAA cell) and the unlicensed band cell, efficient communication is possible. Note that performing cell aggregation in a license band cell and an unlicensed band cell is referred to as LTE-U (LTE-Unlicensed), LAA (Licensed assisted access), or access supporting a license band. Details are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 3.

3GPP discusses further extending TD-LTE. For example, it has been discussed to further expand the uplink-downlink configuration that can be configured in the current TD-LTE.

In Non-Patent Document 4, as an additional uplink-downlink configuration, an uplink-downlink configuration in which all subframes in a single radio frame are all downlink subframes (downlink only configuration / 10: 0 configuration / Supplemental downlink configuration) has been proposed.

However, in the current LTE HARQ, retransmission data can be transmitted from the base station apparatus to the terminal apparatus only in the cell that transmitted the initial transmission data. If the unlicensed band is not available (when the unlicensed band is occupied by communication in another wireless communication system using the same frequency), communication in the cell of the unlicensed band cannot be performed. That is, when retransmission data is transmitted in a cell of an unlicensed band, the retransmission data cannot be transmitted until the unlicensed band becomes available. In such a situation, it takes a long time to transmit data from the base station apparatus to the terminal apparatus, which causes a significant deterioration in transmission efficiency.

Some aspects of the present invention have been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is a base station apparatus and a terminal capable of improving transmission efficiency in a communication system in which a base station apparatus and a terminal apparatus communicate with each other. An apparatus, a communication system, a communication method, and an integrated circuit are provided.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, some aspects of the present invention take the following measures. That is, in the terminal device of the present embodiment, at least the first serving cell group and the second serving cell group are aggregated,
When the first physical downlink control channel is detected in the first serving cell group, the first physical downlink shared channel allocated by the first physical downlink control channel is received, and the first physical downlink control channel is When two physical downlink control channels are detected, the second physical downlink shared channel assigned by the second physical downlink control channel is received and received via the first physical downlink shared channel Whether the data is a retransmission of the data received via the second physical downlink shared channel is based on a predetermined field of the first physical downlink control channel.

(2) In addition, in the terminal device according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that retransmission is performed based on the predetermined field, reception of data via the first physical downlink shared channel is Related to the HARQ process of the HARQ entity for two serving cell groups.

(3) Also, in the terminal device of the present embodiment, information indicating a serving cell index of the second serving cell group is set in the predetermined field.

(4) Also, in the terminal device of the present embodiment, information indicating a serving cell index of an arbitrary serving cell group set in the terminal device is set in the predetermined field.

(5) In addition, in the terminal device according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that retransmission is performed based on the predetermined field, reception of data via the first physical downlink shared channel is optional. Related to the HARQ process of the HARQ entity for the serving cell group.

(6) Further, in the terminal device of the present embodiment, the first serving cell group includes at least one unlicensed band cell.

According to some aspects of the present invention, transmission efficiency can be improved in a wireless communication system in which a base station device and a terminal device communicate.

It is a conceptual diagram of the radio | wireless communications system of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the radio | wireless frame of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the slot of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the physical channel and physical signal in the downlink sub-frame of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the physical channel and physical signal in the uplink sub-frame of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the physical channel and physical signal in the special sub-frame of this embodiment. It is a schematic block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal device 1 of this embodiment. It is a schematic block diagram which shows the structure of the base station apparatus 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of DRS. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of CRS and / or a structure of DRS. It is a figure which shows another example of a structure of DRS. It is a figure which shows an example of designation | designated of the resource element with respect to the setting of DRS. It is a figure which shows the model of a measurement. It is a figure which shows the numerical formula of the search space of PDCCH and EPDCCH.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.

In the present embodiment, the terminal device 1 may be set with a plurality of cells. Here, a technique in which the terminal device 1 communicates via a plurality of cells is referred to as cell aggregation, carrier aggregation, or dual connectivity. The present invention may be applied to each of a plurality of cells set for the terminal device 1. Further, the present invention may be applied to some of the plurality of set cells. A cell set in the terminal device 1 is also referred to as a serving cell.

In carrier aggregation (CA), a plurality of configured serving cells include one primary cell (PCell: Primary Cell) and one or more secondary cells (SCell: Secondary Cell).

The primary cell is a serving cell in which an initial connection establishment (initial connection establishment) procedure is performed, a serving cell that starts a connection コネクション re-establishment procedure, or a cell designated as a primary cell in a handover procedure. The primary cell operates at the primary frequency. A secondary cell may be set at the time when the connection is (re) built or afterwards. The secondary cell operates at the secondary frequency. The connection may be referred to as an RRC connection.

For the terminal device 1 that supports CA, it is aggregated by one primary cell and one or more secondary cells.

Dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity) refers to radio resources provided from at least two different network points (master base station device (MeNB: Master eNB) and secondary base station device (SeNB: Secondary 所定 eNB)). Is the operation that consumes. In other words, the dual connectivity is that the terminal device 1 performs RRC connection at at least two network points. In the dual connectivity, the terminal device 1 may be connected in a RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state and by a non-ideal backhaul.

In the dual connectivity, the base station device 3 connected to at least S1-MME (Mobility Management Entity) and serving as a mobility anchor of the core network is referred to as a master base station device. Further, the base station device 3 that is not a master base station device that provides additional radio resources to the terminal device 1 is referred to as a secondary base station device. When the serving cell group related to the master base station device is called a master cell group (MCG: GMaster Cell Group) and the serving cell group related to the secondary base station device is called a secondary cell group (SCG: Secondary Cell Group) There is also.

The master cell group is a group of serving cells associated with a MeNB configured with one PCell and optionally one or more SCells in dual connectivity. The secondary cell group is a group of serving cells associated with a SeNB that includes one pSCell and optionally one or more SCells in dual connectivity.

In dual connectivity, two MAC entities (two MAC entities) are set in the terminal device 1. One Mac entity is for the master cell group and one Mac entity is for the secondary cell group.

In dual connectivity, the primary cell belongs to the MCG. In SCG, a secondary cell corresponding to a primary cell is referred to as a primary secondary cell (pSCell: “Primary” Secondary ”Cell). The pSCell may be referred to as a special cell or a special secondary cell (Special （SCell: CellSpecial Secondary Cell). The special SCell (base station apparatus configuring the special SCell) may support functions (capability, performance) equivalent to PCell (base station apparatus configuring the PCell). Moreover, only some functions of PCell may be supported by pSCell. For example, the pSCell may support a function of transmitting PDCCH. In addition, the pSCell may support a function of performing PDCCH transmission using a search space different from CSS or USS. For example, a search space different from USS is a search space determined based on a value defined in the specification, a search space determined based on an RNTI different from C-RNTI, and the like. Further, the pSCell may always be in an activated state. Moreover, pSCell is a cell which can receive PUCCH.

For dual connectivity operation, the MCG PCell or the SCG pSCell may be referred to as a special cell (SpCell). Other than the dual connectivity operation, the PCell may be referred to as a special cell (SpCell: Special Cell).

In dual connectivity, a radio bearer (data radio bearer (DRB: Data Radio Bearer) and / or signaling radio bearer (SRB: Signaling radio Radio Bearer)) may be allocated individually in the MeNB and SeNB.

In dual connectivity, duplex mode may be set individually for MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell, respectively.

In dual connectivity, MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell need not be synchronized.

In dual connectivity, a plurality of timing adjustment parameters (TAG: “Timing” Advance ”Group) may be set in each of MCG and SCG (or PCell and pSCell). That is, there is no need to synchronize between the MCG and the SCG.

In dual connectivity, the terminal apparatus 1 transmits the UCI corresponding to the cell in the MCG only to the MeNB (PCell), and transmits the UCI corresponding to the cell in the SCG only to the SeNB (pSCell). For example, UCI is SR, HARQ-ACK, and / or CSI. Further, in each UCI transmission, a transmission method using PUCCH and / or PUSCH is applied to each cell group.

In the primary cell, all signals can be transmitted / received, but in the secondary cell, there are signals that cannot be transmitted / received. For example, PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. Also, PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell unless a plurality of TAGs (Timing Advance Group) are set between cells. Also, PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. MIB (Master Information Block) is transmitted only in the primary cell.

In the primary secondary cell, signals that can be transmitted and received in the primary cell are transmitted and received. For example, PUCCH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell. Moreover, PRACH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell irrespective of whether several TAG is set. Moreover, PBCH and MIB may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell.

In the primary cell, RLF (Radio Link Failure) is detected. The secondary cell does not recognize that RLF has been detected even if the conditions for detecting RLF are met. In the primary secondary cell, the RLF is detected if the condition is satisfied. When the RLF is detected in the primary secondary cell, the upper layer of the primary secondary cell notifies the upper layer of the primary cell that the RLF has been detected.

In the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell, SPS (Semi-Persistent Scheduling) or DRX (Discontinuous Transmission) may be performed. The total number of SPS settings and DRX settings may be determined by the total number of primary cells and primary secondary cells. The secondary cell may perform the same DRX as the primary cell or primary secondary cell of the same cell group.

In the secondary cell, information / parameters related to MAC settings are basically shared with the primary cell / primary secondary cell of the same cell group. Some parameters (for example, sTAG-Id) may be set for each secondary cell.

Some timers and counters may be applied only to the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell. A timer or counter that is applied only to the secondary cell may be set.

In the wireless communication system according to the present embodiment, a FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) or TDD (Time Division Duplex) scheme frame configuration type (Frame Structure Type) is applied. The frame configuration type may be referred to as a frame structure type or a duplex mode. In the case of cell aggregation, the TDD scheme may be applied to all of a plurality of cells. In the case of cell aggregation, cells to which the TDD scheme is applied and cells to which the FDD scheme is applied may be aggregated. When cells to which TDD is applied and cells to which FDD is applied are aggregated, the present invention can be applied to cells to which TDD is applied.

In a cell to which FDD is applied, a half-duplex FDD scheme or a full-duplex FDD scheme may be applied.

When a plurality of cells to which TDD is applied are aggregated, a half-duplex TDD scheme or a full-duplex TDD scheme may be applied.

The terminal apparatus 1 transmits information indicating a combination of bands for which carrier aggregation is supported by the terminal apparatus 1 to the base station apparatus 3. The terminal device 1 transmits to the base station device 3 information indicating whether or not simultaneous transmission and reception in the plurality of serving cells in a plurality of different bands are supported for each combination of bands.

In this embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meaning of “X or Y”. In the present embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meanings of “X and Y”. In the present embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meaning of “X and / or Y”.

FIG. 1 is a conceptual diagram of the wireless communication system of the present embodiment. In FIG. 1, the radio communication system includes terminal apparatuses 1A to 1C and a base station apparatus 3. Hereinafter, the terminal devices 1A to 1C are referred to as the terminal device 1.

The physical channel and physical signal of this embodiment will be described.

In FIG. 1, an uplink physical channel is used in uplink wireless communication from the terminal device 1 to the base station device 3. The uplink physical channel can be used to transmit information output from an upper layer. Uplink physical channels include PUCCH (Physical-Uplink-Control Channel), PUSCH (Physical-Uplink Shared Channel), PRACH (Physical-Random Access Channel), and the like.

PUCCH is a physical channel used for transmitting uplink control information (Uplink Control Information: UCI). Uplink control information includes downlink channel state information (Channel State Information: CSI), scheduling request (Scheduling Request: SR) indicating a PUSCH resource request, downlink data (Transport block: TB, Downlink-Shared Channel, DL -SCH) includes ACK (acknowledgement) / NACK (negative-acknowledgement). ACK / NACK is also referred to as HARQ-ACK, HARQ feedback, or response information.

The PUSCH is a physical channel used to transmit uplink data (Uplink-Shared Channel: UL-SCH). The PUSCH may also be used to transmit HARQ-ACK and / or channel state information along with uplink data. Also, the PUSCH may be used to transmit only channel state information or only HARQ-ACK and channel state information.

PRACH is a physical channel used to transmit a random access preamble. The main purpose of the PRACH is that the terminal device 1 synchronizes with the base station device 3 in the time domain. In addition, PRACH is also used to indicate initial connection establishment (initial connection establishment) procedure, handover procedure, connection reestablishment (connection re-establishment) procedure, synchronization for uplink transmission (timing adjustment), and PUSCH resource requirements. Used.

In FIG. 1, uplink physical signals are used in uplink wireless communication. The uplink physical signal includes an uplink reference signal (Uplink Reference Signal: UL RS) and the like. As the uplink reference signal, DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal), SRS (Sounding Reference Signal), or the like is used. DMRS relates to transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH. DMRS is time-multiplexed with PUSCH or PUCCH. The base station apparatus 3 uses DMRS to perform propagation channel correction for PUSCH or PUCCH. Hereinafter, transmitting both PUSCH and DMRS is simply referred to as transmitting PUSCH. Hereinafter, transmitting both PUCCH and DMRS is simply referred to as transmitting PUCCH. The uplink DMRS is also referred to as UL-DMRS. SRS is not related to PUSCH or PUCCH transmission. The base station apparatus 3 uses SRS to measure the uplink channel state.

There are two trigger type SRS (trigger type 0 SRS, trigger type 1 SRS). The trigger type 0 SRS is transmitted when parameters related to the trigger type 0 SRS are set by higher layer signaling. The trigger type 1 SRS is transmitted when parameters related to the trigger type 1 SRS are set by higher layer signaling and transmission is requested by an SRS request included in the DCI format 0 / 1A / 2B / 2C / 2D / 4. The SRS request is included in both FDD and TDD for the DCI format 0 / 1A / 4, and is included only in TDD for the DCI format 2B / 2C / 2D. When transmission of trigger type 0 SRS and transmission of trigger type 1 SRS occur in the same subframe of the same serving cell, transmission of trigger type 1 SRS is prioritized.

In FIG. 1, a downlink physical channel is used in downlink radio communication from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1. The downlink physical channel is used for transmitting information output from an upper layer. The downlink physical channels are PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel), PCFICH (Physical Control Format Indicator Channel), PHICH (Physical Hybrid automatic repeat request Indicator Channel), PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel), EPDCCH (Enhanced Physical Channel 、 Control) PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel), PMCH (Physical Multicast Channel) and the like are included.

The PBCH is used to broadcast a master information block (Master Information Block: MIB, Broadcast Channel: BCH) commonly used in the terminal device 1. The MIB can be updated at 40 ms intervals. The PBCH is repeatedly transmitted at a period of 10 ms. Specifically, the MIB is initially transmitted in subframe 0 in a radio frame satisfying SFN mod 4 = 0, and the MIB is retransmitted in subframe 0 in all other radio frames. SFN (system frame number) is a radio frame number (system frame number). MIB is system information. For example, the MIB includes information indicating SFN.

PCFICH is used for transmitting information indicating a region (OFDM symbol) used for transmission of PDCCH.

The PHICH is used to transmit an HARQ indicator (HARQ feedback, response information) indicating ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) received by the base station apparatus 3. It is done. For example, when the terminal device 1 receives a HARQ indicator indicating ACK, the corresponding uplink data is not retransmitted. For example, when the terminal apparatus 1 receives a HARQ indicator indicating NACK, the corresponding uplink data is retransmitted. A single PHICH transmits a HARQ indicator for a single uplink data. The base station apparatus 3 transmits each of the HARQ indicators for a plurality of uplink data included in the same PUSCH using a plurality of PHICHs.

PDCCH and EPDCCH are used to transmit downlink control information (Downlink Control Information: DCI). The downlink control information is also referred to as a DCI format. The downlink control information includes a downlink grant (downlink grant) and an uplink grant (uplink grant). The downlink grant is also referred to as downlink assignment (downlink allocation) or downlink assignment (downlink allocation).

The PDCCH is transmitted by a set of one or more continuous CCEs (Control Channel Element). The CCE is composed of nine REGs (Resource Element Group). The REG is composed of four resource elements. A PDCCH composed of n consecutive CCEs starts with a CCE that satisfies imodn = 0. Here, i is a CCE number.

The EPDCCH is transmitted by a set of one or more continuous ECCE (Enhanced Control Channel Element). The ECCE is composed of a plurality of EREGs (Enhanced Resource Resource Element Group).

The downlink grant is used for scheduling a single PDSCH within a single cell. The downlink grant is used for scheduling the PDSCH in the same subframe as the subframe in which the downlink grant is transmitted. The uplink grant is used for scheduling a single PUSCH within a single cell. The uplink grant is used for scheduling a single PUSCH in a subframe that is four or more after the subframe in which the uplink grant is transmitted.

A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) parity bit is added to the DCI format. The CRC parity bit is scrambled by RNTI (Radio Network Temporary Identifier). The RNTI is an identifier that can be defined or set according to the purpose of the DCI. The RNTI is set as an identifier preliminarily defined in the specification, an identifier set as information specific to a cell, an identifier set as information specific to the terminal device 1, or information specific to a group belonging to the terminal device 1. Identifier. For example, the CRC parity bit is scrambled by C-RNTI (Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier) or SPS C-RNTI (Semi-Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier). C-RNTI and SPS C-RNTI are identifiers for identifying the terminal device 1 in the cell. C-RNTI is used to control PDSCH or PUSCH in a single subframe. The SPS C-RNTI is used to periodically allocate PDSCH or PUSCH resources.

PDSCH is used to transmit downlink data (Downlink Shared Channel: DL-SCH). The PDSCH is also used for transmitting higher layer control information.

PMCH is used to transmit multicast data (Multicast Channel: MCH).

In FIG. 1, the following downlink physical signals are used in downlink wireless communication. The downlink physical signal includes a synchronization signal (Synchronization signal: SS), a downlink reference signal (Downlink Reference Signal: DL RS), and the like.

The synchronization signal is used for the terminal device 1 to synchronize the downlink frequency domain and time domain. The synchronization signal is arranged in a predetermined subframe in the radio frame. For example, in the TDD scheme, the synchronization signal is arranged in

subframes

0, 1, 5, and 6 in a radio frame. In the FDD scheme, the synchronization signal is arranged in

subframes

0 and 5 in the radio frame.

The synchronization signal includes a primary synchronization signal (PSS: Primary Synchronization Signal) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS: Secondary Synchronization Signal). The PSS is used for coarse frame / symbol timing synchronization (time domain synchronization) and cell group identification. SSS is used for more accurate frame timing synchronization and cell identification. That is, frame timing synchronization and cell identification can be performed by using PSS and SSS.

The downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to correct the propagation path of the downlink physical channel. The downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information. The downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to measure the geographical position of the own device.

The downlink reference signal includes CRS (Cell-specific Reference Signal), URS (UE-specific Reference Signal) related to PDSCH, DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) related to EPDCCH, NZP CSI-RS (Non-Zero Power Chanel State Information-Reference Signal), MBSFN RS (Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service over Single Frequency Network Reference signal), PRS (Positioning Reference Signal), NCT CRS (New Carrier Type Cell-specific Reference Signal) and DRS (Discovery Reference Signal) Etc. Also, downlink resources include ZP CSI-RS (Zero Power Channel State Information Information-Reference Signal), CSI-IM (Channel State Information-Interference Measurement), and the like.

CRS is transmitted in the entire bandwidth of the subframe. CRS is used to demodulate PBCH / PDCCH / PHICH / PCFICH / PDSCH. The CRS may be used for the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information. PBCH / PDCCH / PHICH / PCFICH is transmitted through an antenna port used for CRS transmission.

URS related to PDSCH is transmitted in a subframe and a band used for transmission of PDSCH related to URS. URS is used to demodulate the PDSCH with which the URS is associated.

PDSCH is transmitted by an antenna port used for transmission of CRS or URS based on the transmission mode and the DCI format. The DCI format 1A is used for scheduling of PDSCH transmitted through an antenna port used for CRS transmission. The DCI format 2D is used for scheduling of the PDSCH transmitted through the antenna port used for URS transmission.

DMRS related to EPDCCH is transmitted in subframes and bands used for transmission of EPDCCH related to DMRS. DMRS is used to demodulate the EPDCCH with which DMRS is associated. The EPDCCH is transmitted through an antenna port used for DMRS transmission.

NZP CSI-RS is transmitted in the set subframe. The resource for transmitting the NZP CSI-RS is set by the base station apparatus 3. The NZP CSI-RS is used by the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information. The terminal device 1 performs signal measurement (channel measurement) using NZP CSI-RS.

ZP CSI-RS resources are set by the base station device 3. The base station apparatus 3 transmits ZP CSI-RS with zero output. That is, the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit ZP CSI-RS. The base station apparatus 3 does not transmit PDSCH and EPDCCH in the resource set by ZP CSI-RS.

The CSI-IM resource is set by the base station apparatus 3. The CSI-IM resource is set to overlap (overlap) with a part of the ZP CSI-RS resource. That is, the CSI-IM resource has the same characteristics as the ZP CSI-RS, and the base station apparatus 3 transmits the resource set as CSI-IM with zero output. That is, the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit CSI-IM. The base station apparatus 3 does not transmit PDSCH and EPDCCH in resources set by CSI-IM. In a resource supported by the NZP CSI-RS in a certain cell, the terminal device 1 can measure interference with the resource set as the CSI-IM.

The channel state information (CSI) includes CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator), RI (Rank Indicator), and PTI (Precoding Type Indicator), and is measured using CSI-RS or CRS. .

The MBSFN RS is transmitted in the entire band of the subframe used for PMCH transmission. The MBSFN RS is used for PMCH demodulation. PMCH is transmitted through an antenna port used for transmission of MBSFN RS.

PRS is used for the terminal device 1 to measure the geographical position of the device itself.

NCT CRS can be mapped to a predetermined subframe. For example, NCT CRS is mapped to

subframes

0 and 5. The NCT CRS can use the same configuration as a part of the CRS. For example, in each resource block, the position of the resource element to which the NCT CRS is mapped can be the same as the position of the resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped. Also, the sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined based on information set through PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, or PDSCH (RRC signaling). A sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined based on parameters such as a cell ID (for example, a physical layer cell identifier) and a slot number. The sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined by a method (expression) different from the sequence (value) used for CRS of antenna port 0. The NCT CRS may be referred to as TRS (Tracking Reference Signal).

The downlink physical channel and the downlink physical signal are collectively referred to as a downlink signal. The uplink physical channel and the uplink physical signal are collectively referred to as an uplink signal. The downlink physical channel and the uplink physical channel are collectively referred to as a physical channel. The downlink physical signal and the uplink physical signal are collectively referred to as a physical signal.

BCH, MCH, UL-SCH and DL-SCH are transport channels. A channel used in a medium access control (Medium Access Control: MAC) layer is referred to as a transport channel. A transport channel unit used in the MAC layer is also referred to as a transport block (transport block: TB) or a MAC PDU (Protocol Data Unit). In the MAC layer, HARQ (HybridbrAutomatic Repeat reQuest) is controlled for each transport block. The transport block is a unit of data that the MAC layer delivers to the physical layer. In the physical layer, the transport block is mapped to a code word, and an encoding process is performed for each code word.

As a method of control information signaling (notification and notification) from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1, PDCCH signaling that is signaling through PDCCH, RRC signaling that is signaling through RRC layer (layer), and MAC layer (layer MAC signaling which is signaling through) is used. The RRC signaling is dedicated RRC signaling (DedicatedDeRRC signaling) for notifying control information unique to the terminal device 1 or common RRC signaling (Common RRC signaling) for notifying control information unique to the base station device 3. It is. In the following description, when simply described as RRC signaling, RRC signaling is dedicated RRC signaling and / or common RRC signaling. Signaling used by higher layers as viewed from the physical layer, such as RRC signaling and MAC CE, may be referred to as upper layer signaling.

Hereinafter, the configuration of a radio frame according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a radio frame according to the present embodiment. Each radio frame is 10 ms long. Each radio frame is composed of two half frames. Each half frame is 5 ms long. Each half frame is composed of 5 subframes. Each subframe is 1 ms long and is defined by two consecutive slots. Each of the slots is 0.5 ms long. The i-th subframe in the radio frame is composed of a (2 × i) th slot and a (2 × i + 1) th slot. That is, 10 subframes are defined in each radio frame.

The subframe includes a downlink subframe (first subframe), an uplink subframe (second subframe), a special subframe (third subframe), and the like.

The downlink subframe is a subframe reserved for downlink transmission. The uplink subframe is a subframe reserved for uplink transmission. The special subframe is composed of three fields. The three fields are DwPTS (Downlink Pilot Time Slot), GP (Guard Period), and UpPTS (Uplink Pilot Time Slot). The total length of DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS is 1 ms. DwPTS is a field reserved for downlink transmission. UpPTS is a field reserved for uplink transmission. GP is a field in which downlink transmission and uplink transmission are not performed. Note that the special subframe may be configured only by DwPTS and GP, or may be configured only by GP and UpPTS. The special subframe is arranged between the downlink subframe and the uplink subframe in TDD, and is used for switching from the downlink subframe to the uplink subframe.

A single radio frame is composed of a downlink subframe, an uplink subframe, and / or a special subframe. That is, the radio frame may be configured with only downlink subframes. Further, the radio frame may be composed of only uplink subframes.

The wireless communication system of this embodiment supports 5 ms and 10 ms downlink-uplink-switch-point-periodicity. When the downlink-uplink switch point period is 5 ms, a special subframe is included in both half frames in the radio frame. When the downlink-uplink switch point period is 10 ms, a special subframe is included only in the first half frame in the radio frame.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the slot of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the slot according to the present embodiment. In this embodiment, normal CP (normal Cyclic Prefix) is applied to the OFDM symbol. An extended CP (extendedexCyclic Prefix) may be applied to the OFDM symbol. The physical signal or physical channel transmitted in each of the slots is represented by a resource grid. In the downlink, the resource grid is defined by a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency direction and a plurality of OFDM symbols in the time direction. In the uplink, the resource grid is defined by a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency direction and a plurality of SC-FDMA symbols in the time direction. The number of subcarriers or resource blocks depends on the cell bandwidth. The number of OFDM symbols or SC-FDMA symbols constituting one slot is 7 for normal CP and 6 for extended CP. Each element in the resource grid is referred to as a resource element. Resource elements are identified using subcarrier numbers and OFDM symbol or SC-FDMA symbol numbers.

The resource block is used for mapping to a resource element of a certain physical channel (PDSCH or PUSCH). As resource blocks, virtual resource blocks and physical resource blocks are defined. A physical channel is first mapped to a virtual resource block. Thereafter, the virtual resource block is mapped to the physical resource block. One physical resource block is defined by 7 consecutive OFDM symbols or SC-FDMA symbols in the time domain and 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. Therefore, one physical resource block is composed of (7 × 12) resource elements. One physical resource block corresponds to one slot in the time domain and corresponds to 180 kHz in the frequency domain. Physical resource blocks are numbered from 0 in the frequency domain. Further, two resource blocks in one subframe corresponding to the same physical resource block number are defined as physical resource block pairs (PRB pair, RB pair).

Hereinafter, physical channels and physical signals transmitted in each subframe will be described.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the downlink subframe according to the present embodiment. The base station apparatus 3 can transmit a downlink physical channel (PBCH, PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH) and / or a downlink physical signal (synchronization signal, downlink reference signal) in the downlink subframe. PBCH is transmitted only in subframe 0 in the radio frame. Note that the downlink reference signal is arranged in resource elements distributed in the frequency domain and the time domain. For simplicity of explanation, the downlink reference signal is not shown in FIG.

In the PDCCH region, a plurality of PDCCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed. In the EPDCCH region, a plurality of EPDCCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed. In the PDSCH region, a plurality of PDSCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed. PDCCH, PDSCH and / or EPDCCH may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed.

FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the uplink subframe according to the present embodiment. The terminal device 1 may transmit an uplink physical channel (PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH) and an uplink physical signal (UL-DMRS, SRS) in the uplink subframe. In the PUCCH region, a plurality of PUCCHs are frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed. In the PUSCH region, a plurality of PUSCHs may be frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed. PUCCH and PUSCH may be frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed. The PRACH may be arranged over a single subframe or two subframes. A plurality of PRACHs may be code-multiplexed.

SRS is transmitted using the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. That is, the SRS is arranged in the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. The terminal device 1 can restrict simultaneous transmission of SRS and PUCCH / PUSCH / PRACH in a single SC-FDMA symbol of a single cell. In a single uplink subframe of a single cell, the terminal apparatus 1 transmits PUSCH and / or PUCCH using an SC-FDMA symbol excluding the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe, The SRS can be transmitted using the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 can transmit SRS, PUSCH, and PUCCH in a single uplink subframe of a single cell. DMRS is time-multiplexed with PUCCH or PUSCH. For simplicity of explanation, DMRS is not shown in FIG.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the special subframe of the present embodiment. In FIG. 6, DwPTS is composed of the first to tenth SC-FDMA symbols in the special subframe, GP is composed of the eleventh and twelfth SC-FDMA symbols in the special subframe, and UpPTS is the special subframe. It consists of the 13th and 14th SC-FDMA symbols in the frame.

The base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, synchronization signal, and downlink reference signal in the DwPTS of the special subframe. The base station apparatus 3 can restrict PBCH transmission in the DwPTS of the special subframe. The terminal device 1 may transmit PRACH and SRS in the UpPTS of the special subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 can restrict transmission of PUCCH, PUSCH, and DMRS in the UpPTS of the special subframe.

FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal device 1 of the present embodiment. As illustrated, the terminal device 1 includes an upper layer processing unit 101, a control unit 103, a receiving unit 105, a transmitting unit 107, and a transmission / reception antenna 109. The higher layer processing unit 101 includes a radio resource control unit 1011, a subframe setting unit 1013, a scheduling information interpretation unit 1015, and a channel state information (CSI) report control unit 1017. The reception unit 105 includes a decoding unit 1051, a demodulation unit 1053, a demultiplexing unit 1055, a radio reception unit 1057, and a channel measurement unit 1059. The transmission unit 107 includes an encoding unit 1071, a modulation unit 1073, a multiplexing unit 1075, a radio transmission unit 1077, and an uplink reference signal generation unit 1079.

The upper layer processing unit 101 outputs uplink data (transport block) generated by a user operation or the like to the transmission unit 107. The upper layer processing unit 101 includes a medium access control (MAC: Medium Access Control) layer, a packet data integration protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP) layer, a radio link control (Radio Link Control: RLC) layer, and radio resource control. Process the (Radio Resource Control: RRC) layer. When performing carrier aggregation, the upper layer processing unit 101 has a function of controlling the physical layer to perform cell activation / deactivation and a function of controlling the physical layer to manage uplink transmission timing. I have. The upper layer processing unit 101 has a function of determining whether to report a measurement instruction calculated by the receiving unit 105 and a measurement result calculated by the receiving unit 105.

The radio resource control unit 1011 included in the upper layer processing unit 101 manages various setting information of the own device. Also, the radio resource control unit 1011 generates information arranged in each uplink channel and outputs the information to the transmission unit 107.

The subframe setting unit 1013 included in the higher layer processing unit 101 is based on information set by the base station device 3, and is different from the base station device 3 and / or the base station device 3 (for example, the base station device). The subframe setting in 3A) is managed. For example, the subframe setting is an uplink or downlink setting for the subframe. Subframe configuration includes subframe pattern configuration (Subframe pattern configuration), uplink-downlink configuration (Uplink-downlink configuration), uplink reference UL-DL configuration (Uplink reference configuration), and downlink reference UL-DL configuration (Downlink). reference configuration) and / or transmission direction UL-DL configuration (transmission direction configuration). The subframe setting unit 1013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL-DL setting. set. Also, the subframe setting unit 1013 can set at least two subframe sets. The subframe pattern setting includes EPDCCH subframe setting. The subframe setting unit 1013 is also referred to as a terminal subframe setting unit.

The scheduling information interpretation unit 1015 included in the upper layer processing unit 101 interprets the DCI format (scheduling information) received via the reception unit 105, and based on the interpretation result of the DCI format, the reception unit 105 and the transmission unit Control information is generated in order to perform the control of 107 and output to the control unit 103.

The scheduling information interpretation unit 1015 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL-DL setting. Based on this, the timing for performing the transmission process and the reception process is determined.

The CSI report control unit 1017 specifies a CSI reference resource. The CSI report control unit 1017 instructs the channel measurement unit 1059 to derive the CQI related to the CSI reference resource. The CSI report control unit 1017 instructs the transmission unit 107 to transmit CQI. The CSI report control unit 1017 sets a setting used when the channel measurement unit 1059 calculates CQI.

The control unit 103 generates a control signal for controlling the receiving unit 105 and the transmitting unit 107 based on the control information from the higher layer processing unit 101. Control unit 103 outputs the generated control signal to receiving unit 105 and transmitting unit 107 to control receiving unit 105 and transmitting unit 107.

The reception unit 105 separates, demodulates, and decodes the reception signal received by the transmission / reception antenna 109 from the base station apparatus 3 based on the control signal input from the control unit 103. The receiving unit 105 outputs the decoded information to the upper layer processing unit 101.

The radio reception unit 1057 converts the downlink signal received by the transmission / reception antenna 109 into an intermediate frequency (down-conversion: down convert), removes unnecessary frequency components, and amplifies the signal level so that the signal level is appropriately maintained. The level is controlled, quadrature demodulation is performed based on the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the received signal, and the analog signal that has been demodulated is converted into a digital signal. The radio reception unit 1057 removes a portion corresponding to a guard interval (Guard Interval: GI) from the converted digital signal, performs a fast Fourier transform (FFT Fourier Transform: FFT) on the signal from which the guard interval is removed, Extract the region signal.

The demultiplexer 1055 separates the PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, and / or downlink reference signal from the extracted signal. Further, demultiplexing section 1055 compensates the propagation path of PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and / or PDSCH from the estimated value of the propagation path input from channel measurement section 1059. Also, the demultiplexing unit 1055 outputs the demultiplexed downlink reference signal to the channel measurement unit 1059.

The demodulating unit 1053 multiplies the PHICH by a corresponding code and synthesizes the signal, demodulates the synthesized signal using a BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Shift Keying) modulation method, and outputs the demodulated signal to the decoding unit 1051. Decoding section 1051 decodes the PHICH addressed to the own apparatus, and outputs the decoded HARQ indicator to higher layer processing section 101. Demodulation section 1053 performs QPSK modulation demodulation on PDCCH and / or EPDCCH, and outputs the result to decoding section 1051. Decoding section 1051 attempts to decode PDCCH and / or EPDCCH, and outputs the decoded downlink control information and the RNTI corresponding to the downlink control information to higher layer processing section 101 when the decoding is successful.

The demodulation unit 1053 demodulates the modulation scheme notified by the downlink grant such as QPSK (Quadrature Shift Keying), 16QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM, and the like to the decoding unit 1051. Decoding section 1051 performs decoding based on the information regarding the coding rate notified by the downlink control information, and outputs the decoded downlink data (transport block) to higher layer processing section 101.

The channel measurement unit 1059 measures the downlink path loss and channel state from the downlink reference signal input from the demultiplexing unit 1055, and outputs the measured path loss and channel state to the upper layer processing unit 101. Also, channel measurement section 1059 calculates an estimated value of the downlink propagation path from the downlink reference signal, and outputs it to demultiplexing section 1055. The channel measurement unit 1059 performs channel measurement and / or interference measurement in order to calculate CQI. The channel measurement unit 1059 performs measurement notified from the downlink reference signal input from the demultiplexing unit 1055 to the upper layer. Channel measurement section 1059 calculates RSRP and RSRQ and outputs the result to upper layer processing section 101.

The transmission unit 107 generates an uplink reference signal in accordance with the control signal input from the control unit 103, encodes and modulates the uplink data (transport block) input from the higher layer processing unit 101, PUCCH, The PUSCH and the generated uplink reference signal are multiplexed and transmitted to the base station apparatus 3 via the transmission / reception antenna 109.

The encoding unit 1071 performs encoding such as convolutional encoding and block encoding on the uplink control information input from the higher layer processing unit 101. The encoding unit 1071 performs turbo encoding based on information used for PUSCH scheduling.

The modulation unit 1073 modulates the coded bits input from the coding unit 1071 using a modulation method notified by downlink control information such as BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, or a modulation method predetermined for each channel. . Modulation section 1073 determines the number of spatially multiplexed data sequences based on information used for PUSCH scheduling, and uses MIMO SM (Multiple Input Multiple Output Spatial Multiplexing) to transmit a plurality of data transmitted on the same PUSCH. Are mapped to a plurality of sequences, and precoding is performed on the sequences.

The uplink reference signal generation unit 1079 is a physical layer cell identifier for identifying the base station device 3 (referred to as physical cell identity: PCI, Cell ID, etc.), a bandwidth for arranging the uplink reference signal, and an uplink grant. A sequence determined by a predetermined rule (formula) is generated on the basis of the cyclic shift and the parameter value for generating the DMRS sequence notified in (1). The multiplexing unit 1075 rearranges the PUSCH modulation symbols in parallel according to the control signal input from the control unit 103, and then performs a discrete Fourier transform (Discrete-Fourier-Transform: DFT). Also, multiplexing section 1075 multiplexes the PUCCH and PUSCH signals and the generated uplink reference signal for each transmission antenna port. That is, multiplexing section 1075 arranges the PUCCH and PUSCH signals and the generated uplink reference signal in the resource element for each transmission antenna port.

The radio transmission unit 1077 performs inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) on the multiplexed signal, performs SC-FDMA modulation, and adds a guard interval to the SC-FDMA-modulated SC-FDMA symbol. Generating a baseband digital signal, converting the baseband digital signal to an analog signal, generating an in-phase component and a quadrature component of an intermediate frequency from the analog signal, removing an extra frequency component for the intermediate frequency band, The intermediate frequency signal is converted to a high frequency signal (up-conversion: up convert), an extra frequency component is removed, the power is amplified, and output to the transmission / reception antenna 109 for transmission.

FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram showing the configuration of the base station apparatus 3 of the present embodiment. As illustrated, the base station apparatus 3 includes an upper layer processing unit 301, a control unit 303, a reception unit 305, a transmission unit 307, and a transmission / reception antenna 309. The higher layer processing unit 301 includes a radio resource control unit 3011, a subframe setting unit 3013, a scheduling unit 3015, and a CSI report control unit 3017. The reception unit 305 includes a decoding unit 3051, a demodulation unit 3053, a demultiplexing unit 3055, a wireless reception unit 3057, and a channel measurement unit 3059. The transmission unit 307 includes an encoding unit 3071, a modulation unit 3073, a multiplexing unit 3075, a radio transmission unit 3077, and a downlink reference signal generation unit 3079.

The upper layer processing unit 301 includes a medium access control (MAC: Medium Access Control) layer, a packet data integration protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP) layer, a radio link control (Radio Link Control: RLC) layer, a radio resource control (Radio). Resource (Control: RRC) layer processing. Further, upper layer processing section 301 generates control information for controlling receiving section 305 and transmitting section 307 and outputs the control information to control section 303. The upper layer processing unit 301 has a function of acquiring the reported measurement result.

The radio resource control unit 3011 included in the higher layer processing unit 301 generates downlink data (transport block), system information, RRC message, MAC CE (Control Element), etc. arranged in the downlink PDSCH, or higher level. Obtained from the node and output to the transmission unit 307. The radio resource control unit 3011 manages various setting information of each terminal device 1.

The subframe setting unit 3013 included in the higher layer processing unit 301 includes subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or Management of the transmission direction UL-DL setting is performed for each terminal device 1. The subframe setting unit 3013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or for each terminal apparatus 1. Alternatively, the transmission direction UL-DL setting is set. The subframe setting unit 3013 transmits information related to subframe setting to the terminal device 1. The subframe setting unit 3013 is also referred to as a base station subframe setting unit.

The base station apparatus 3 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL for the terminal apparatus 1. -DL settings may be determined. Also, the base station apparatus 3 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission to the terminal apparatus 1. The direction UL-DL setting may be instructed from an upper node.

For example, the subframe setting unit 3013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink based on the uplink traffic volume and the downlink traffic volume. A reference UL-DL configuration and / or a transmission direction UL-DL configuration may be determined.

The subframe setting unit 3013 can manage at least two subframe sets. The subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the terminal devices 1. The subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the serving cells. The subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the CSI processes. The subframe setting unit 3013 can transmit information indicating at least two subframe sets to the terminal device 1 via the transmission unit 307.

The scheduling unit 3015 included in the upper layer processing unit 301 uses the received channel state information and the channel allocation information, the channel estimation value, the channel quality, the channel quality, and the like to assign physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH). The coding rate and modulation scheme and transmission power of the frame and physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH) are determined. The scheduling unit 3015 determines whether to schedule a downlink physical channel and / or downlink physical signal or schedule an uplink physical channel and / or uplink physical signal in a flexible subframe. Based on the scheduling result, scheduling section 3015 generates control information (for example, DCI format) for controlling receiving section 305 and transmitting section 307 and outputs the control information to control section 303.

The scheduling unit 3015 generates information used for scheduling of physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH) based on the scheduling result. The scheduling unit 3015 is based on UL-DL configuration, subframe pattern configuration, uplink-downlink configuration, uplink reference UL-DL configuration, downlink reference UL-DL configuration, and / or transmission direction UL-DL configuration. Thus, the timing (subframe) for performing the transmission process and the reception process is determined.

The CSI report control unit 3017 provided in the higher layer processing unit 301 controls the CSI report of the terminal device 1. The CSI report control unit 3017 transmits information indicating various settings assumed by the terminal device 1 to derive the CQI in the CSI reference resource to the terminal device 1 via the transmission unit 307.

The control unit 303 generates a control signal for controlling the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307 based on the control information from the higher layer processing unit 301. The control unit 303 outputs the generated control signal to the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307 and controls the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307.

The receiving unit 305 separates, demodulates and decodes the received signal received from the terminal device 1 via the transmission / reception antenna 309 according to the control signal input from the control unit 303, and outputs the decoded information to the higher layer processing unit 301. . The radio reception unit 3057 converts an uplink signal received via the transmission / reception antenna 309 into an intermediate frequency (down-conversion: down convert), removes unnecessary frequency components, and appropriately maintains the signal level. In this way, the amplification level is controlled, and based on the in-phase and quadrature components of the received signal, quadrature demodulation is performed, and the quadrature demodulated analog signal is converted into a digital signal.

The wireless receiver 3057 removes a portion corresponding to a guard interval (Guard Interval: GI) from the converted digital signal. The radio reception unit 3057 performs fast Fourier transform (FFT) on the signal from which the guard interval is removed, extracts a frequency domain signal, and outputs the signal to the demultiplexing unit 3055.

The demultiplexing unit 1055 demultiplexes the signal input from the radio receiving unit 3057 into signals such as PUCCH, PUSCH, and uplink reference signal. This separation is performed based on radio resource allocation information included in the uplink grant that is determined in advance by the base station apparatus 3 using the radio resource control unit 3011 and notified to each terminal apparatus 1. In addition, demultiplexing section 3055 compensates for the propagation paths of PUCCH and PUSCH from the propagation path estimation value input from channel measurement section 3059. Further, the demultiplexing unit 3055 outputs the separated uplink reference signal to the channel measurement unit 3059.

The demodulator 3053 performs inverse discrete Fourier transform (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform: IDFT) on the PUSCH, acquires modulation symbols, and performs BPSK (Binary Shift Keying), QPSK, 16QAM, The received signal is demodulated using a predetermined modulation scheme such as 64QAM, or the modulation method notified by the own device to each terminal device 1 in advance using an uplink grant. The demodulator 3053 uses the MIMO SM based on the number of spatially multiplexed sequences notified in advance to each terminal device 1 using an uplink grant and information indicating precoding performed on the sequences. A plurality of uplink data modulation symbols transmitted on the PUSCH are separated.

The decoding unit 3051 encodes the demodulated PUCCH and PUSCH encoding bits in a predetermined encoding scheme, or a coding rate at which the device itself notifies the terminal device 1 in advance with an uplink grant. And the decoded uplink data and the uplink control information are output to the upper layer processing unit 101. When PUSCH is retransmitted, decoding section 3051 performs decoding using the encoded bits held in the HARQ buffer input from higher layer processing section 301 and the demodulated encoded bits. Channel measurement section 309 measures an estimated channel value, channel quality, and the like from the uplink reference signal input from demultiplexing section 3055 and outputs the result to demultiplexing section 3055 and higher layer processing section 301.

The transmission unit 307 generates a downlink reference signal according to the control signal input from the control unit 303, encodes and modulates the HARQ indicator, downlink control information, and downlink data input from the higher layer processing unit 301. Then, the PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, and downlink reference signal are multiplexed, and the signal is transmitted to the terminal device 1 via the transmission / reception antenna 309.

The encoding unit 3071 is a predetermined encoding method such as block encoding, convolutional encoding, turbo encoding, and the like for the HARQ indicator, downlink control information, and downlink data input from the higher layer processing unit 301 Or is encoded using the encoding method determined by the radio resource control unit 3011. The modulation unit 3073 modulates the coded bits input from the coding unit 3071 with a modulation scheme determined in advance by the radio resource control unit 3011 such as BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.

The downlink reference signal generation unit 3079 generates a known sequence as a downlink reference signal, which is obtained by a predetermined rule based on a physical layer cell identifier (PCI) for identifying the base station apparatus 3 and the like. To do. The multiplexing unit 3075 multiplexes the modulated modulation symbol of each channel and the generated downlink reference signal. That is, multiplexing section 3075 arranges the modulated modulation symbol of each channel and the generated downlink reference signal in the resource element.

The wireless transmission unit 3077 performs inverse fast Fourier transform (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform: IFFT) on the multiplexed modulation symbols and the like, performs modulation in the OFDM scheme, adds a guard interval to the OFDM symbol that has been OFDM-modulated, and baseband The baseband digital signal is converted to an analog signal, the in-phase and quadrature components of the intermediate frequency are generated from the analog signal, the extra frequency components for the intermediate frequency band are removed, and the intermediate-frequency signal Is converted to a high-frequency signal (up-conversion: up convert), an extra frequency component is removed, power is amplified, and output to the transmission / reception antenna 309 for transmission.

Here, PDCCH or EPDCCH is used for notifying (designating) downlink control information (DCI) to the terminal device. For example, in the downlink control information, information on PDSCH resource allocation, information on MCS (Modulation and coding Coding scheme), information on scrambling identity (also called scrambling identifier), reference signal sequence identity (base sequence identity, Information on a base sequence identifier and a base sequence index).

In the following, small cells will be described.

“Small cell” is a generic term for a cell having a small coverage, which is configured by the base station apparatus 3 having a lower transmission power than a macro cell. Since small cells can be set to have a small coverage, they can be operated densely. The small cell base station apparatus 3 is arranged at a different location from the macro cell base station apparatus. The closely arranged small cells are synchronized and can be configured as a small cell cluster. The small cells in the small cell cluster are connected by backhaul (optical fiber, X2 interface, S1 interface). In the small cells in the small cell cluster, eICIC (enhanced Inter-Cell Interference Coordination), FeICIC (Further enhanced Inter Inter- Interference suppression techniques such as Cell Interference Coordination and CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point transmission / reception) can be applied. The small cell may be operated in a different frequency band from that of the macro cell, or may be operated in the same frequency band. In particular, from the viewpoint of propagation path attenuation (path loss), it is easy to configure a smaller cell by operating a small cell in a higher frequency band than a macro cell.

Small cells operated in different frequency bands are operated using macro cells and carrier aggregation technology or dual connectivity technology.

Also, the small cell may be operated at the same frequency as the macro cell. Small cells may be operated outside the coverage of macro cells. The small cell base station apparatus 3 may be arranged at the same location as the macro cell base station apparatus.

Also, whether a certain cell is a macro cell or a small cell is recognized by the base station device 3, and the terminal device 1 does not need to recognize it. For example, the base station apparatus 3 can set the macro cell as Pcell and the small cell as Scell or pSCell for the terminal apparatus 1. In any case, the terminal device 1 only needs to recognize as PCell, SCell, or pSCell, and does not need to be recognized as a macro cell or a small cell.

Below, the details of the carrier aggregation technology and dual connectivity technology will be explained.

Depending on the capability (performance and function) of the terminal device 1, the secondary cell is configured by configuring a serving cell set together with the primary cell. The number of downlink component carriers set in the terminal device 1 must be greater than or equal to the number of uplink component carriers set in the terminal device 1, and only the uplink component carrier is set as a secondary cell. It is not possible.

The terminal device 1 always uses a primary cell and a primary secondary cell for transmission of PUCCH. In other words, the terminal device 1 does not expect to transmit the PUCCH in a secondary cell other than the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

The reconfiguration / addition / deletion of the secondary cell is performed by RRC. When adding a new secondary cell, it sends all system information needed for the new secondary cell by dedicated RRC signaling. That is, in the RRC connected mode, it is not necessary to obtain system information directly from the secondary cell by notification.

When the carrier aggregation is set, the activation / deactivation mechanism of the secondary cell is supported. Primary cells are not activated / deactivated. When the secondary cell is deactivated, the terminal device 1 does not need to receive the associated PDCCH or PDSCH, cannot transmit on the associated uplink, and does not need to perform CQI measurement. On the other hand, when the secondary cell is activated, the terminal device 1 receives the PDSCH and the PDCCH, and therefore expects to be able to perform CQI measurement.

Activation / deactivation mechanism is based on the combination of MAC CE and deactivation timer. MAC CE notifies secondary cell activation and deactivation information in bitmap format. Bits that are set to 1 indicate activation of the associated secondary cell, and bits that are set to 0 indicate deactivation of the associated secondary cell.

Note that the secondary cell set in the terminal device 1 is set to be deactivated as an initial state. That is, even if various parameters for the secondary cell are set for the terminal device 1, it is not always possible to perform communication using the secondary cell.

Next, an example of MAC CE will be described.

An example of the configuration of the activation / deactivation MAC CE will be described. The MAC CE has a fixed size and is composed of seven Ci fields and one R field, and is defined as follows. When Ci is a secondary cell set to secondary cell index (SCellIndex) i, the Ci field indicates the activation / deactivation state of the secondary cell with secondary cell index i. When there is no secondary cell in which the secondary cell index i is set, the terminal device 1 ignores the Ci field. When the Ci field is set to “1”, it indicates that the secondary cell with the secondary cell index i is activated. When the Ci field is set to “0”, it indicates that the secondary cell with the secondary cell index i has been deactivated. R is a reserved bit and is set to “0”.

Next, an example of a deactivation timer (Deactivation Timer) for the secondary cell will be described.

When the deactivation timer is set for the secondary cell, it is a timer related to the maintenance time of the secondary cell. The terminal device 1 holds a deactivation timer for each secondary cell, and when the deactivation timer expires, the terminal device 1 deactivates the secondary cell related to the expired deactivation timer.

The initial value of the deactivation timer for the secondary cell is set from the upper layer (RRC layer) using the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10. As the initial value of the deactivation timer for the secondary cell, for example, one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which is a value related to the number of radio frames, is set. Here, rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames, rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames, rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames, rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames, and rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames. Correspondingly, rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames and rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.

Note that the field related to the deactivation timer for the secondary cell (parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10) is set only in the terminal device 1 in which one or more secondary cells are set.

If there is no field related to the deactivation timer, the terminal device 1 deletes the existing value of the field related to the deactivation timer and assumes that infinity is set as the value.

When only one field related to the deactivation timer for the secondary cell is set for the terminal device 1, the same initial value of the deactivation timer is applied to each secondary cell (deactivation timer). Related functions are performed independently in each secondary cell).

An example of the activation / deactivation mechanism will be described.

When receiving the MAC CE instructing the activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 sets the secondary cell whose activation is set by the MAC CE as the activation. Here, the terminal device 1 can perform the following operations on the secondary cell for which activation is set by the MAC CE. The operation includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell Data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.

When receiving the MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts a deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the MAC CE. The term “start” means that the timer starts counting while holding the value. Note that restarting means setting a value to an initial value and starting a timer count.

When receiving the MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 triggers transmission of transmission power remaining capacity (power headroom (PHR: Power head room)).

When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 deactivates the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Set as a tivat.

When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received, or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 relates to the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Stop the deactivation timer.

When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received, or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 relates to the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Flush all HARQ buffers

When the activated PDCCH in the secondary cell indicates a downlink grant (uplink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the activated secondary cell is activated When the downlink grant for the cell (downlink セル grant) or the uplink grant for the activated secondary cell (uplink アクティベー grant) is indicated, the terminal device 1 restarts the deactivation timer related to the activated secondary cell.

When the secondary cell is deactivated, the terminal device 1 does not perform the following operation on the deactivated secondary cell. The operation includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI reporting to the secondary cell, uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in the secondary cell, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, and PDCCH transmission in the secondary cell. It is a PDCCH monitor for a monitor and a secondary cell.

When the deactivation is set for the secondary cell that is executing the random access procedure (Random Access procedure), the terminal device 1 stops the random access procedure that is being executed.

An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is the first secondary cell activation / deactivation timing or the conventional secondary cell activation / deactivation timing. Called.

When receiving an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting among the operations corresponding to the activation described above. The operations excluding the related operations and the operations related to the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell are defined as a minimum requirement (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes). )) And not earlier than subframe n + 8. Of the operations corresponding to the activation described above, operations related to CSI reporting and operations related to a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell must be applied in subframe n + 8.

That is, when the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, CQI (ChannelＣQualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the activation command must be started or restarted. SRS transmission in the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell is not slower than the minimum requirement (minimummrequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and not earlier than subframe n + 8 Transmission of link data (UL-SCH), transmission of RACH in the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and monitoring of PDCCH for the secondary cell can be performed. That is, SRS transmission in the secondary cell, uplink data in the secondary cell, which is later than the minimum requirement (minimum requirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and earlier than subframe n + 8 (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell cannot be performed.

Note that starting the deactivation timer means holding the value and starting the timer count. The deactivation timer is restarted when the value is set to an initial value and the timer starts counting.

Note that the minimum requirement may be different for FDD (E-UTRA FDD) and TDD (E-UTRA TDD). That is, the terminal device 1 that has received the activation command for the secondary cell may apply (set) a different minimum requirement depending on whether the secondary cell is FDD or TDD.

In the subframe n, the terminal device 1 receives the deactivation command for the secondary cell (MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) or the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) related to the secondary cell is received. Among the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above, operations other than the operations related to CSI reporting are defined as the minimum requirements (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes) ) And not earlier than subframe n + 8. Of the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above, operations related to CSI reporting must be applied in subframe n + 8. That is, it is applied later than the defined minimum requirement (minimum requirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and earlier than subframe n + 8.

That is, when receiving the deactivation command for the secondary cell (MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 receives the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) for the secondary cell in the subframe n + 8. ) / PMI (Precoding / Matrix / Indicator) / RI (Rank / Indicator) / PTI (Precoding / Type / Indicator) is not reported. And it is not later than the minimum requirement (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)), and is not earlier than subframe n + 8, and does not transmit SRS in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell In this case, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted, RACH is not transmitted in the secondary cell, PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell.

An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a second secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.

By applying the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in this example, the transition time from the deactivation state to the activation state (or the transition time from the OFF state to the ON state) can be shortened. . Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.

When the terminal device 1 receives an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 enters the operation corresponding to the activation described above (or enters the ON state). The corresponding action) must be applied in subframe n + 8.

That is, when the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, CQI (ChannelＣQualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, start or restart deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the activation command, SRS transmission in the secondary cell, secondary It is possible to perform uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in a cell, RACH transmission in a secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in a secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for a secondary cell.

Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD.

Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD.

Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be activated (or turned on) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.

The terminal device 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, or a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer related to the secondary cell) ) Has expired, the operation corresponding to the deactivation described above (or the operation corresponding to the OFF state) must be applied in subframe n + 8.

That is, when the terminal apparatus 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported, SRS is not transmitted in the secondary cell, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell is not transmitted. The RACH is not transmitted, the PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and the PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell.

Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD.

Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD.

Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.

Note that the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of the present example to all the set secondary cells. The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of this example may be applied to at least one secondary cell. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in all the set secondary cells, and in each of the set secondary cells. Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied.

An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a third secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.

By applying the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in this example, the secondary cell activation (or ON state) is instructed and then PDCCH monitoring starts in the secondary cell and / or for the secondary cell It is possible to shorten the time until the start of monitoring of the PDCCH. Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.

When the terminal device 1 receives an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 enters the operation corresponding to the activation described above (or enters the ON state). Operations corresponding to CSI reporting, operations related to the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell, operations other than PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell Must be applied no later than the defined minimum requirements (minimum requirement, eg 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and no earlier than subframe n + 8 There. Of the operations corresponding to the activation described above, operations related to CSI reporting, operations related to a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and PDCCH for the secondary cell Must be applied in subframe n + 8.

That is, when the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, CQI (ChannelＣQualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, start or restart deactivation timer related to secondary cell for which activation is set by activation command, monitor PDCCH in secondary cell, monitor PDCCH for secondary cell Must be applied. SRS transmission in the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell is not slower than the minimum requirement (minimummrequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and not earlier than subframe n + 8 Transmission of link data (UL-SCH) and transmission of RACH in the secondary cell can be performed.

Although an example in which PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell are applied in subframe n + 8 has been described, operations applied in subframe n + 8 are SRS transmission in the secondary cell and secondary cell. Uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.

The terminal device 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, or a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer related to the secondary cell) ) Expires, among the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above (or the operations corresponding to the OFF state), the operation related to CSI reporting, the operation related to monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell Operations other than those related to monitoring of the PDCCH are not slower than the defined minimum requirements (minimumminirequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)), and subframe n It must be applied no earlier than 8. Of the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above, operations related to CSI reporting must be applied in subframe n + 8.

That is, when the terminal apparatus 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported, PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell. And it is not later than the minimum requirement (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)), and is not earlier than subframe n + 8, and does not transmit SRS in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell The uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted on the secondary cell, and the RACH is not transmitted on the secondary cell.

In addition, although the example which does not monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell and the PDCCH for the secondary cell in the subframe n + 8 has been described, the operations not performed in the subframe n + 8 are the SRS transmission in the secondary cell, Any of transmission of uplink data (UL-SCH), transmission of RACH in the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and monitoring of PDCCH for the secondary cell may be used.

An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.

By applying the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in this example, the time from the activation of the secondary cell (or ON state) to the start of the operation corresponding to the activation in the secondary cell It can be shortened. Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.

When receiving an activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, terminal apparatus 1 receives CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) for the secondary cell in subframe n + 8. / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, Deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the activation command must be started or restarted. And in sub-frame n + A, transmission of SRS in a secondary cell can be performed. Then, in subframe n + B, uplink data (UL-SCH) can be transmitted in the secondary cell. Then, in the subframe n + C, the RACH can be transmitted in the secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + D, PDCCH can be monitored in a secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + E, the PDCCH with respect to a secondary cell can be monitored.

A, B, C, D, and E may be set (transmitted or notified by a signal) from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer), or may be preset values. The value may be a value related to the capability of the terminal device 1 or may be a predetermined value determined by a specification or the like.

A, B, C, D, and E may be transmitted or broadcast from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer (Higher layer) using one value (or parameter), or may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer. It may be transmitted or notified from a layer (Higher layer) using a plurality of values (or parameters).

Note that A, B, C, D, and E may be set individually, or some or all may be set in common. A, B, C, D, and E may be commonly set for the operation. For example, a common value is set for the PDCCH monitor in the secondary cell and the PDCCH monitor for the secondary cell. May be.

When the terminal apparatus 1 receives the deactivation command for the secondary cell in the subframe n, in the subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel QualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) for the secondary cell is received. / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported. And in sub-frame n + A, transmission of SRS in a secondary cell is not performed. Then, in subframe n + B, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted in the secondary cell. Then, in subframe n + C, RACH is not transmitted in the secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + D, PDCCH monitoring in a secondary cell is not performed. And in sub-frame n + E, PDCCH monitoring with respect to a secondary cell is not performed.

The terminal device 1 may set A, B, C, D, E based on one value (or parameter) transmitted or broadcast from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer), The terminal device 1 may set A, B, C, D, and E based on a plurality of values (or parameters) transmitted or notified from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer).

The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is the timing at which a part or all of the operations corresponding to activation / deactivation are applied after the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell. Preferably there is.

The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is the timing at which a part or all of the operations corresponding to the ON state / OFF state are applied after the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell. It is preferable that

Note that a plurality of secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied to the terminal device 1 (a plurality of timings may be set).

The activation command for the secondary cell may be a MAC CE that instructs activation (or ON) of the secondary cell, or an L1 signal related to the instruction for activation (or ON) of the secondary cell. (A predetermined DCI, a predetermined DCI format, a predetermined field in the predetermined DCI format) or an L2 signal (predetermined MAC CE) related to the activation (or ON) of the secondary cell. It may be any signal related to the instruction to activate (or turn on) the secondary cell.

The deactivation command for the secondary cell may be a MAC CE for instructing the deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell, or an L1 signal related to the instruction for the deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell. (Predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI format, predetermined field in predetermined DCI format) or L2 signal (predetermined MAC CE) related to the instruction of deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell There may be any signal related to the instruction of deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell.

The ON state of the secondary cell may be a state where an operation corresponding to activation may be possible, a state where a part of the operation corresponding to activation may be possible, or an operation corresponding to activation. In addition, any operation may be possible or impossible.

Note that the secondary cell OFF state may be a state in which an operation corresponding to the deactivation can be performed, or a part of the operation corresponding to the deactivation may be possible. In addition to the operation to be performed, any operation may be possible or impossible.

Note that the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 whose minimum requirement is 8 ms (8 subframes).

The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 that does not have a minimum requirement.

The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 having a predetermined terminal capability (UE （capability). Further, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be the terminal device 1 that has transmitted or reported information indicating a predetermined terminal capability (UE capability). Here, the predetermined terminal capability includes a capability related to a predetermined activation / deactivation, a capability related to a predetermined secondary cell, a capability related to ON / OFF (start / stop) of a cell, and a capability related to DRS. , Capability related to RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell ON / OFF, capability related to RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell activation / deactivation, DRS L1 signal related to cell activation / deactivation, L1 signal related to cell ON / OFF (capacity related to predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI format, predetermined field in predetermined DCI format) Signal (predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI format , A capability related to a predetermined field in a predetermined DCI format, a capability related to an L2 signal related to ON / OFF of a cell (predetermined MAC CE), an L2 signal related to cell activation / deactivation (predetermined) May be related to MAC CE).

The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 in which a secondary cell to which ON / OFF can be applied is set, and a predetermined activation / deactivation is performed. May be a terminal device 1 in which a secondary cell to which is applicable is set, or a terminal device 1 in which RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to activation / deactivation is set, It may be a terminal device 1 in which RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell ON / OFF (start / stop) is set, and L1 signal (predetermined DCI) related to cell ON / OFF , The predetermined DCI format, the predetermined format in the predetermined DCI format Terminal device 1 that has received the L1 signal (a predetermined field in a predetermined DCI, a predetermined DCI format, or a predetermined DCI format) may be used. 1 may be a terminal device 1 that has received an L2 signal (predetermined MAC CE) related to cell ON / OFF, and may be an L2 signal (predetermined predetermined) related to cell activation / deactivation. It may be the terminal device 1 that has received (MAC CE).

The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 in which DRS is set, or a terminal device 1 in which a function related to DRS is set. Also good. Functions related to DRS include downlink time domain synchronization based on DRS (time synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization based on DRS (frequency synchronization), and cell / transmission point identification based on DRS (cell / transmission point) identification), measurement of RSRP based on DRS (RSRP measurement), measurement of RSRQ based on DRS (RSRQ measurement), measurement of geographical location of UE 1 based on DRS (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI based on DRS ( CSI measurement).

Note that the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may receive the activation command to trigger a predetermined communication. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to start random access (RACH transmission) by receiving an activation command. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to receive an SRS by receiving an activation command. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to receive CSI by receiving an activation command. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to transmit CSI based on DRS (calculated based on DRS) by receiving an activation command. .

The terminal device 1 may switch the timing of the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation according to the conditions. For example, the terminal device 1 may switch the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation timing to any of the first to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timings according to conditions.

The terminal device 1 may be set with a default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, and may switch the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation timing according to conditions. For example, in the terminal device 1, the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, and is applied according to conditions. The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing may be switched to any of the second to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timings.

The terminal device 1 has initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing set, and, depending on conditions, the initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing and L1 signaling at the same time Cell ON / OFF (start / stop) may be applied. For example, in the terminal device 1, the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, The ON / OFF (start / stop) of the cell using L1 signaling may be applied simultaneously with the timing of 1 (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation.

The terminal device 1 has a default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing set, and depending on conditions, a different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, or a cell using L1 signaling ON / OFF (start / stop) may be applied. For example, in the terminal device 1, the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, Any one of timings of second to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation, or cell ON / OFF (start / stop) using L1 signaling may be applied.

When a plurality of cells are set in the terminal device 1 (one primary cell and one or more secondary cells are set), the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is secondary. It is preferably applied only to the cell. That is, the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is preferably not applied to the primary cell.

In addition, when a plurality of cells are set in the terminal device 1 (one primary cell and one or a plurality of secondary cells are set), the cell is different for each cell set in the terminal device 1. Secondary cell activation / deactivation timing may be applied. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of cells are set may switch the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing for each cell.

When a plurality of secondary cells are set in the terminal device 1, a common secondary cell activation / deactivation timing may be applied to the plurality of secondary cells installed in the terminal device 1. . That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may switch the timing of secondary cell activation / deactivation for the plurality of secondary cells.

When a plurality of cell groups (one cell group is preferably configured to include at least one primary cell and one primary secondary cell) is set in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied for each set cell group. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of cell groups are set may switch the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing for each cell group.

The details of the primary / secondary cell will be described below.

The primary / secondary cell is a cell used in dual connectivity. The dual connectivity is an operation in which a predetermined terminal device consumes radio resources provided from at least two different network points (a master base station device (MeNB: Master eNB) and a secondary base station device (SeNB: Secondary eNB)). is there. In other words, dual connectivity is that a terminal device makes an RRC connection at at least two network points. In dual connectivity, the terminal devices may be connected in a RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state and by a non-ideal backhaul.

In the dual connectivity, a base station device connected to at least the S1-MME and serving as a mobility anchor of the core network is referred to as a master base station device. A base station device that is not a master base station device that provides additional radio resources to the terminal device is referred to as a secondary base station device. When the serving cell group associated with the master base station device is referred to as a master cell group (MCG), and the serving cell group associated with the secondary base station device is referred to as a secondary cell group (SCG). There is also. The cell group may be a serving cell group.

In dual connectivity, the primary cell belongs to the MCG. In the SCG, a secondary cell corresponding to the primary cell is referred to as a primary secondary cell (pSCell: Primary Secondary Cell). Note that the pSCell may be referred to as a special cell or a special secondary cell (Special SCell: Special Secondary Cell). The special SCell (base station apparatus configuring the special SCell) may support a part of the function of the PCell (base station apparatus configuring the PCell) (for example, a function of transmitting and receiving PUCCH). Moreover, only some functions of PCell may be supported by pSCell. For example, the pSCell may support a function of transmitting PDCCH. In addition, the pSCell may support a function of performing PDCCH transmission using a search space different from CSS or USS. For example, a search space different from USS is based on a search space determined based on a value defined in the specification, a search space determined based on an RNTI different from C-RNTI, and a value set in an upper layer different from RNTI. Search space determined by Further, the pSCell may always be in an activated state. Moreover, pSCell is a cell which can receive PUCCH.

In dual connectivity, a data radio bearer (DRB: Data Radio Bearer) may be individually allocated in the MeNB and SeNB. On the other hand, a signaling radio bearer (SRB: Signaling Radio Bearer) may be allocated only to the MeNB. In dual connectivity, duplex modes may be set individually for MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell, respectively. In dual connectivity, MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell may not be synchronized. In the dual connectivity, a plurality of timing adjustment parameters (TAG: Timing Advance Group) may be set in each of the MCG and the SCG. That is, the terminal device can perform uplink transmission at different timings in each CG.

In the dual connectivity, the terminal device can transmit the UCI corresponding to the cell in the MCG only to the MeNB (PCell), and the UCI corresponding to the cell in the SCG can be transmitted only to the SeNB (pSCell). For example, UCI is SR, HARQ-ACK, and / or CSI. Further, in each UCI transmission, a transmission method using PUCCH and / or PUSCH is applied to each cell group.

In the primary cell, all signals can be transmitted / received, but in the secondary cell, there are signals that cannot be transmitted / received. For example, PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. Further, PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell unless a plurality of TAGs (Timing Advance Group) are set between cells. Also, PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. Also, the MIB (Master Information Block) is transmitted only in the primary cell. In the primary secondary cell, signals that can be transmitted and received in the primary cell are transmitted and received. For example, PUCCH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell. Moreover, PRACH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell irrespective of whether several TAG is set. Moreover, PBCH and MIB may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell.

In the primary cell, RLF (Radio Link Failure) is detected. The secondary cell does not recognize that RLF has been detected even if the conditions for detecting RLF are met. In the primary secondary cell, the RLF is detected if the condition is satisfied. When the RLF is detected in the primary secondary cell, the upper layer of the primary secondary cell notifies the upper layer of the primary cell that the RLF has been detected. In the primary cell, SPS (Semi-Persistent Scheduling) or DRX (Discontinuous Reception) may be performed. The secondary cell may perform the same DRX as the primary cell. In the secondary cell, information / parameters related to MAC settings are basically shared with the primary cell / primary secondary cell of the same cell group. Some parameters (for example, sTAG-Id) may be set for each secondary cell. Some timers and counters may be applied only to the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell. A timer or counter that is applied only to the secondary cell may be set.

Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings or conditions for switching (applying) cells to ON / OFF (start / stop) using L1 signaling will be described.

The condition is preferably that a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set / not set. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 for which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set performs the switching.

It is preferable that the condition is that DRS is set for the carrier frequency for the band, and that a predetermined higher layer parameter is set / not set. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band and a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band and a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set performs the switching.

It is preferable that the condition is that DRS is set / not set to the carrier frequency for the band. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 for which DRS is not set performs the switching.

It is preferable that the condition is that DRS is set / not set to the carrier frequency for a band (licensed band assisted access) used for LAA (licensed band and cell-unaggregated unlicensed band). For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the terminal apparatus 1 in which DRS is not set as the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA performs the switching.

The condition is preferably that DRS is set / not set for the carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band). For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which DRS is set as a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the terminal apparatus 1 in which DRS is not set to the carrier frequency for the band used for non-LAA performs the switching.

The condition is that a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set (in the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) in the band used for LAA (Licensed assisted access) (unlicensed band that is cell-aggregated with the license band). Preferably / not. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set in the band used for LAA (in the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set in the band used for LAA (in the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) performs the switching.

As a condition, a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) in a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band). Preferably / not. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set in a band used for non-LAA (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set in a band used for non-LAA (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) performs the switching.

Note that the switching is preferably performed (applied) to a cell (secondary cell) corresponding to a carrier frequency for a band.

The condition is preferably that self-carrier scheduling or cross-carrier scheduling is / are not set for a band (unlicensed band that is cell-aggregated with a license band) used for LAA (Licensed assisted access). That is, it is preferable that PDCCH in a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA or PDCCH for a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA is detected (decoded).

The condition is preferably that self carrier scheduling or cross carrier scheduling is / is not set for a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band). That is, it is preferable that PDCCH in a cell corresponding to a band used for non-LAA or PDCCH for a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA is detected (decoded).

The predetermined upper layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is a parameter related to switching (application) to a different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, or ON / OFF (activation / deactivation) of a cell using L1 signaling. It may be a parameter related to switching (application) to (stop). For example, it may be information related to instructing switching (application) or information related to not instructing switching (application).

Setting DRS means setting parameters related to DRS. For example, physical cell identifiers related to DRS (PCID: physical cell ID, physCellID, physical layer cell ID) and DRS are related. Any of virtual cell identifier (VCID: virtual cell ID), CSI-RS resource element configuration (CSI-RSRE configuration) related to DRS, and CSI-RS subframe configuration (CSI-RS subframeSIconfiguration) related to DRS is set It may be done. Here, the CSI-RS subframe setting related to DRS is preferably equal to the subframe offset between the SSS (secondary synchronization signal) and the CSI-RS in the DRS opportunity (DRS occasion).

The DRS functions include downlink time domain synchronization based on DRS (time （synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization based on DRS (frequency synchronization), and cell / transmission point identification based on DRS (cell / transmission point). identification), measurement of RSRP based on DRS (RSRP measurement), measurement of RSRQ based on DRS (RSRQ measurement), measurement of geographical location of UE 1 based on DRS (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI based on DRS ( CSI measurement).

DRS is composed of multiple signals. As an example, DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CRS. Further, when DRS measurement based on CSI-RS (CSI-RS-based DRS measurement) is set in the terminal device 1, the DRS is preferably configured by PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS.

The DRS is preferably transmitted in a DRS opportunity (DRS occasion) within a DRS measurement timing setting (DMTC: TCDRS measurement timing configurations). The DMTC is preferably notified (set) by the period and the offset. For DMTC notification (setting), the maximum allowed measurement bandwidth (Maximum allowed measurement) bandwidth, the MBSFN subframe setting of the neighboring cell, and the TDD UL-DL configuration of the neighboring cell may be used.

In addition, when the DRS measurement based on CSI-RS (CSI-RS-based DRS measurement) is set in the terminal device 1, a neighbor transmission point list (neighbor TPs list) is notified in addition to the DMTC notification (setting). May be. The adjacent transmission point list preferably includes information on identification of each transmission point and information for assisting synchronization of each transmission point.

When the CRS-based DRS measurement (CRS-based DRS measurement) is set in the terminal device 1, a neighbor cell list (neighbor cell list) may be notified in addition to the DMTC notification (setting). The neighbor cell list preferably includes information on physical cell identifiers (PCIDs: “physical cell ID”, “physCell ID”, “physical cell layer ID”) of the adjacent cell.

The following describes the unlicensed band (unlicensed band).

A license band is a band that is licensed by the government or frequency manager, and is used for telecommunication business. An unlicensed band (unlicensed band) is a band that does not require a license used in a specific low-power radio station such as a wireless LAN. For example, the unlicensed band may be 2.4 GHz and / or 5 GHz (5150-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, 5725-5850 MHz).

For example, communication based on LTE is possible in the unlicensed band, and efficient communication is possible by performing cell aggregation between the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell. Note that performing cell aggregation in a license band cell and an unlicensed band cell is referred to as LTE-U (LTE-Unlicensed), LAA (Licensed assisted access), or access supporting a license band.

In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, it is preferable to set the license band cell as the primary cell and the unlicensed band cell as the secondary cell. That is, it is preferable that the cell of the unlicensed band is not set as the primary cell.

In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may be operated asynchronously. That is, the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may be operated in dual connectivity.

In the cell of the unlicensed band, it is preferable that there is no PMCH for transmitting multicast data (Multicast Channel: MCH). That is, it is preferable that the PMCH decoding is not set in the cell of the unlicensed band by higher layer signaling. That is, it is preferable that a parameter related to PMCH is not set in an unlicensed band cell by higher layer signaling.

In addition, when the terminal device 1 has the capability of receiving multicast data (Multicast Channel: MCH) in an unlicensed band cell, it is preferable to transmit a parameter (UECapabilityInformation) related to the capability. The parameter (UECapabilityInformation) related to the capability may be held for each band or may be held for each band combination.

The terminal apparatus 1 may be explicitly notified from the base station apparatus 3 that the serving cell set for itself is an unlicensed band cell. For example, information related to indicating that the configured serving cell is an unlicensed band cell may be transmitted through L1 signaling. For example, information related to indicating that the configured serving cell is an unlicensed band cell may be transmitted through L2 signaling. For example, information related to indicating that the configured serving cell is an unlicensed band cell may be transmitted through RRC signaling. For example, information related to indicating that the configured serving cell is a cell of an unlicensed band may be transmitted by higher layer signaling.

The cell of the unlicensed band is a function related to a predetermined activation / deactivation, a function related to a predetermined secondary cell, a function related to ON / OFF (start / stop) of a cell, a function related to DRS, a cell Function related to RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to ON / OFF of cell, function related to RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell activation / deactivation, related to DRS Functions, L1 signals related to cell ON / OFF (predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI format, predetermined field in predetermined DCI format), L1 signals related to cell activation / deactivation ( Predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI fo mat, a function related to a predetermined field in a predetermined DCI format), a function related to an L2 signal related to cell ON / OFF (predetermined MAC CE), an L2 signal related to cell activation / deactivation ( It is preferable to have any of the functions related to a predetermined MAC CE). An unlicensed band cell may have any combination of the above functions.

When performing communication using a cell in the unlicensed band, the terminal device 1 and / or the base station device 3 may transmit a signal (reservation signal) for reserving communication in the unlicensed band. The reservation signal may be a signal for synchronizing time and / or frequency. For example, the reservation signal may be a dummy signal, a downlink reference signal, a downlink control signal (physical downlink control channel), or a downlink data signal (physical downlink shared channel). May be a broadcast signal (physical broadcast channel), DRS, CRS, CSI-RS, PSS, SSS Or any combination thereof. Note that the reservation signal may be transmitted in order to match the subframe boundary (subframe boundary) with the cell of the aggregated license band, to match the slot timing, or to match the OFDM symbol timing. .

When performing communication using an unlicensed band cell, the unlicensed band cell may be operated on a frame basis. The frame base is preferably communication using a plurality of continuous subframes. The frame base is preferably communication conforming to the above-described LTE frame configuration. In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, the subframe boundary (subframe boundary) between the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may match (synchronize), or match ( (Not synchronized). In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, the boundary of the OFDM symbol of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may or may not match (synchronize). May be. In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, the slots of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may or may not match (synchronize). .

Consider a case where an ACK / NACK for a downlink of an unlicensed band cell or a CSI report for a downlink of a cell of an unlicensed band is transmitted on the uplink of a license band cell.

In cell aggregation of a license band cell and an unlicensed band cell, if the subframe boundary (subframe boundary) between the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell does not match (synchronize), the base station apparatus and the terminal It is necessary to preliminarily define the interpretation of the timing of transmitting an ACK / NACK or CSI report between devices (correspondence between subframe subframe boundaries of cells in the license band and cells in the unlicensed band). For example, if the deviation of the subframe boundary of the cell of the unlicensed band from the subframe boundary of the cell of the license band is within a threshold (within x ms), the subframe boundary of the cell of the license band and the cell of the unlicensed band It may be interpreted that the dally is the same. For example, if the subframe boundary of the cell of the unlicensed band is advanced by more than the threshold (advanced by x ms or more) with respect to the subframe boundary of the license band cell, the subframe boundary of the cell of the unlicensed band May be interpreted as the previous subframe boundary with respect to the subframe boundary of the cell of the license band. For example, if the subframe boundary of the cell of the unlicensed band is delayed by more than a threshold (delay of x ms or more) with respect to the subframe boundary of the cell of the license band, the subframe boundary of the cell of the unlicensed band May be interpreted as a subframe boundary subsequent to the subframe boundary of the cell of the license band.

When performing communication using an unlicensed band cell, the unlicensed band cell may be operated on a load basis. The load base is preferably communication that occupies a time channel according to the communication amount. In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, the boundary of the OFDM symbol of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may or may not match (synchronize). May be. Note that consecutive 14 OFDM symbols may be regarded as one subframe. The head OFDM symbol length may be longer by CP.

The cell of the unlicensed band is preferably set to the SCell of the master cell group. The cell of the unlicensed band is preferably set to the SCell of the secondary cell group. That is, it is preferable that the cell of the unlicensed band is not set as a special cell (SpCell: Special Cell).

Note that it is preferable to have one CIF value for one cell group (unlicensed cell group). For example, it is preferable to manage a cell group by a cell group index and use a value corresponding to the cell group index as a CIF value. For example, when the first serving cell, the second serving cell, the first cell group, and the second cell group are aggregated in the terminal device 1, the cell index of the first serving cell is 0, the cell of the second serving cell Preferably, the index is 1, the cell index of the first cell group is 2, and the cell index of the second cell group is 3, and the CIF value corresponding to the first serving cell is 0, corresponding to the second serving cell. It is preferable to set the CIF value to be 1, the CIF value corresponding to the first cell group to 2, and the CIF value corresponding to the second cell group to 3.

Note that the cell group may be referred to as a serving cell group.

Note that it is preferable that at least one unlicensed band cell belongs to one cell group. For example, one cell group is preferably composed of one unlicensed band cell. For example, one cell group is preferably composed of two or more unlicensed band cells. For example, it is preferable that one cell group includes at least one license band cell and at least one unlicensed band cell. For example, it is preferable that one cell group includes a pair of a licensed band cell and an unlicensed band cell (the cell group may be referred to as a cell pair).

Note that unless otherwise specified, the description regarding “cell” and “serving cell” is naturally applicable to “cell group”, “serving cell group”, and “unlicensed cell group”. Note that the cell group having a function corresponding to the primary cell is preferably a primary cell group, and the cell group having a function corresponding to the secondary cell is preferably a secondary cell group.

In addition, when one cell group is comprised by the cell (cell of an unlicensed band) where several LBT is required, the cell which transmits data based on the empty state of a channel (based on the result of LBT) is 1 It is preferable to dynamically switch among cells belonging to one cell group. In addition, when performing transmission in a plurality of cells belonging to one cell group, it is preferable that which cell belonging to one cell group performs transmission is indicated by L1 signaling (for example, PDCCH). For example, PDCCH) is preferably transmitted from another cell (another cell group) that is aggregated.

In addition, when a cell belonging to a cell group performs transmission, it is preferable that resource allocation (for example, resource allocation for PDSCH) is not performed for cells belonging to the cell group.

Note that one cell group may be controlled by one L1 signal. For example, one cell group is preferably controlled by one PDCCH. For example, the L1 signal may indicate that transmission is performed in any cell belonging to one cell group. For example, it may be indicated by the L1 signal that transmission is performed in any cell belonging to one cell group.

Note that one cell group may be controlled by one L2 signal. For example, it is preferable to have one higher layer (Higher layer) / RRC layer (Radio Resource Control layer) for a cell group. For example, one cell group is preferably controlled by one RRC parameter.

Note that one cell group preferably has one MAC entity.

Note that one cell group preferably has one HARQ entity. That is, it is preferable to share (inherit) the HARQ process among a plurality of cells belonging to a cell group. That is, in the case of downlink transmission using a cell group, the HARQ process number for one cell group is indicated by the PDCCH transmitted in one cell group (by the field HARQ Process Number of the DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH). It is preferable that

In addition, when a plurality of cell groups are aggregated in the terminal device 1, one HARQ entity may be provided for the plurality of cell groups, that is, the HARQ process is shared (inherited) between the plurality of cell groups. May be. In addition, when the HARQ process is shared (inherited) among a plurality of cell groups, the HARQ process of any cell group is determined by L1 signaling (for example, a predetermined field of the DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH, for example, CIF). Is preferably notified (which cell group HARQ process is referred to).

In addition, when at least one cell and at least one cell group are aggregated in the terminal device 1, it may have one HARQ entity for at least one cell and at least one cell group, that is, at least one cell. A HARQ process may be shared (inherited) between one cell and at least one cell group. In addition, when the HARQ process is shared (inherited) between at least one cell and at least one cell group, any one is determined by L1 signaling (for example, a predetermined field of DCI format transmitted via PDCCH, for example, CIF) Preferably, the cell or cell group HARQ process is related (which cell or cell group HARQ process is referred to).

If at least one group and at least one cell are aggregated in the terminal device 1, one HARQ entity may be provided for the aggregated cell and cell group, that is, between the cell and the cell group. May share (inherit) the HARQ process.

It is preferable that the cell of the unlicensed band is not used independently (in Standalone).

The license band cell is preferably used for control data and user data communication, and the unlicensed band cell is preferably used for user data communication. Note that it is preferable that an unlicensed band cell has only radio resources used for downlink communication. In other words, an unlicensed band cell may not have radio resources used for uplink communication. preferable. That is, the cell of the unlicensed band is preferably used only for downlink user data transmission.

It is preferable that the license band cell adopts the FDD method or the TDD method using uplink-downlink settings 0 to 6.

It is preferable that the FDD method or the TDD method using the uplink-downlink settings 0 to 6 is applied to the cell of the unlicensed band.

It is preferable that an FDD scheme in which only radio resources (downlink carriers) used for downlink communication exist or a TDD scheme using the uplink-downlink setting 7 is applied to the cell in the unlicensed band. Note that the uplink-downlink configuration is preferably managed in a table.

Note that the uplink-downlink setting of 7 is preferably an uplink-downlink setting in which all subframes in the radio frame are reserved (reserved) as downlink subframes. That is, subframe 1 in the radio frame is not a special subframe. That is, when the uplink-downlink setting is 7,

subframes

0 and 5 are not reserved for downlink transmission, and subframe 2 is not reserved for uplink transmission.

When the uplink-downlink setting is 7, there is no downlink-uplink switch point period.

For license band cells, it is preferable to use OFDM for the downlink access method and SC-FDMA for the uplink access method.

The unlicensed band cell is preferably used by OFDM or SC-FDMA for the downlink access method. When SC-FDMA is used for the downlink access scheme, it is preferable to use single-cluster SC-FDMA (SC-FDMA that does not perform discrete arrangement in the frequency domain).

For unlicensed band cells, it is preferable to use OFDM or SC-FDMA for the uplink access method. When SC-FDMA is used for the uplink access method, it is preferable to use single-cluster SC-FDMA (SC-FDMA that does not perform discrete arrangement in the frequency domain).

Unlicensed band cells are preferably operated at different subcarrier intervals than license band cells. For example, it is preferable that the subcarrier interval of the unlicensed band cell is 312.5 kHz, and the subcarrier interval of the license band cell is 15 kHz.

The cell of the unlicensed band is preferably operated with a radio frame length (subframe length) different from that of the license band cell.

The maximum uplink (or downlink) maximum transmission power of the unlicensed band cell is preferably different from that of the license band cell. For example, the maximum uplink transmission power of an unlicensed band cell is preferably less than 23 dBm.

It is preferable that a cell in an unlicensed band cannot be transmitted and received simultaneously.

The downlink reference signal transmitted in the unlicensed band cell is preferably different from the downlink reference signal transmitted in the license band cell.

It is preferable that some or all of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB are not transmitted to the unlicensed band cell. That is, it is preferable that only a part of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB is transmitted in the unlicensed band cell.

The cell of the unlicensed band is preferably different from the cell of the license band in the transmission frequency of some or all of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS and SIB. For example, an unlicensed band cell preferably has a longer transmission interval in a part or all of the time domain of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB than a license band cell.

It is preferable that there are no resources for random access of unlicensed bands.

The base station device 3 preferably includes collision avoidance means for avoiding a collision between communication in an unlicensed band cell and communication in another wireless communication system using the same frequency. For example, before the base station apparatus starts communication in an unlicensed band cell, it may be in communication so that it detects the usage status of the frequency (channel) to be transmitted and does not transmit multiple carriers at the same frequency. For example, it is preferable to have a function (carrier sense, LBT: “Listen” Before “Talk”, CCA: “Clear” Channel “Assessment”) that tries communication again after a certain time.

The terminal device 1 may perform LBT (carrier sense, CCA), or both the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 may perform LBT. Note that LBT may be performed only in a preset subframe. The LBT may be performed periodically at a set cycle. The LBT may be performed only within a set period. In other words, the LBT is not performed outside the set period.

For example, when the terminal device 1 performs LBT, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 receives information regarding a subframe in which LBT is possible. For example, the information on the subframe capable of LBT is preferably information on a subframe pattern, information on an LBT cycle, or information on an LBT offlet.

Bands (E-UTRA operating bands) that can be used for communication between the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 may be managed by a table shared by the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1. For example, bands that can be used for communication (E-UTRA 可能な operating 通信 bands) may be managed by an index, a band corresponding to a predetermined index may be a license band, and a band corresponding to a predetermined index may be an unlicensed band. . The index of bands (E-UTRAEoperating bands) that can be used for communication may be transmitted as a FreqBandIndicator from the terminal device 1 as a message of terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation). In addition, the band (E-UTRA operating band) index usable for communication is associated with a band operated as an uplink, a band operated as a downlink, and a multiplexing mode (FDD system or TDD system). It is preferable.

When the terminal device 1 supports a function (capability) related to communication in the unlicensed band, the base station device 3 may be notified whether the function related to communication in the unlicensed band is supported. That is, information regarding support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band may be transmitted from the terminal device 1 as a message of terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation). For example, information related to support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band may be included in parameters (PhyLayerParameters) related to the physical layer.

When the terminal device 1 supports a function related to communication in the unlicensed band, information related to support of the function related to communication in the unlicensed band is held (set) for each band, and the terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation) It may be transmitted from the terminal device 1 as a message. For example, information related to support of functions related to communication in an unlicensed band may be included in parameters (RF-Parameters) related to radio frequencies.

The function related to communication in the unlicensed band of the terminal device 1 may be a function related to carrier sense or LBT. Note that the function related to the communication in the unlicensed band of the terminal device 1 may be a function related to the uplink-downlink setting of 7.

Even if the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit / receive data to / from the terminal apparatus 1, in order for the terminal apparatus 1 in the idle state to connect to the base station apparatus 3, a synchronization signal such as PSS / SSS, CRS, PBCH, SIB, etc. A reference signal and broadcast information are transmitted. Therefore, those signals generate inter-cell interference. Moreover, the power of the base station apparatus 3 is wasted by constantly transmitting these signals.

Therefore, the base station apparatus 3 transitions to an ON state (operating state, a starting state) and an OFF state (stopping state). When the base station device 3 does not transmit / receive data to / from the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can transition to the OFF state. When the base station device 3 transmits / receives data to / from the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can transition to the ON state.

For example, the state in which the base station apparatus 3 is stopped is a state in which at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, PBCH, PDCCH, and PDSCH is not transmitted. For example, PSS / SSS is not transmitted for one half frame or more (5 subframes or more). For example, the state where the base station device 3 is stopped is a state where only DRS is transmitted. Note that the base station apparatus 3 may perform reception processing at the receiving unit of the base station apparatus even in a stopped state.

The state in which the cell / base station apparatus 3 is activated is a state in which at least one of PSS / SSS and CRS is transmitted. For example, PSS / SSS is transmitted in one half frame.

In addition, the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3 may be associated by processing (assuming or operation) of the terminal device 1 with respect to a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal. Here, the processing is monitoring, reception processing, transmission processing, or the like. That is, the terminal device 1 does not need to recognize that the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, and the terminal device 1 may switch processing for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal. In the description of the present embodiment, the transition between the start state and the stop state in the base station device 3 includes switching of processing for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal device 1. The activation state in the base station device 3 corresponds to the first process for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal device 1. The stop state in the base station apparatus 3 corresponds to the second process for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal apparatus 1.

For example, the ON state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as a conventional terminal device. A specific example of the base station device 3 in the ON state is as follows. The terminal device 1 expects to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH. The terminal device 1 monitors PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in a predetermined subframe. The terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting based on the set CSI reporting mode. The terminal apparatus 1 expects a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) for CSI reporting and a CSI reference resource to exist.

For example, the OFF state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 performs processing different from that of the conventional terminal device. A specific example of the base station device 3 in the OFF state is as follows. The terminal device 1 does not expect to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH. The terminal device 1 does not monitor PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in all subframes. The terminal device 1 does not report CSI regardless of the set CSI report mode. The terminal device 1 does not expect the presence of a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) and a CSI reference resource for CSI reporting.

The transition between the start state and the stop state in the base station device 3 includes, for example, the connection state of the terminal device 1, the data request status of the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3, and the CSI measurement from the terminal device 1. And / or RRM measurement information.

The base station apparatus 3 can explicitly or implicitly set or notify the terminal apparatus 1 of information (cell state information) regarding transition between the activated state and the deactivated state in the base station apparatus 3. . For example, the base station apparatus 3 explicitly notifies the terminal apparatus 1 of the cell state information using RRC, MAC, PDCCH and / or EPDCCH. The base station device 3 implicitly notifies the cell state information to the terminal device 1 according to the presence or absence of a predetermined channel or signal.

An example of a procedure (cell state information notification) in which the activated base station apparatus 3 transitions to a stopped state will be described.

The base station device 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal device 1 is connected has its activation state stopped based on the connection state of the terminal device 1, the data state of the terminal device 1, and the measurement information of the terminal device 1. It is determined whether or not to transit to. The base station apparatus 3 that has determined to shift to the stop state transmits information to shift to the stop state to the base station apparatus 3 of the surrounding cells, and prepares for cell stop. Note that the determination as to whether or not to change the activation state to the stop state and the transmission of information that changes to the stop state may not be performed in the serving cell. For example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), S -It may be determined and transmitted by a GW (Serving Gateway). In the cell stop preparation, when the terminal device 1 is connected to the base station device 3, the terminal device 1 is instructed to hand over to the surrounding cell, or the deactivation is transmitted. Do. The serving cell to which no terminal device 1 is connected due to cell stop preparation transitions from a start state to a stop state.

When the terminal device 1 communicates with the base station device 3 in a stopped state, the base station device 3 transitions from a stopped state to a started state. The time from the stop to the transition to the start state and the time from the start to the transition to the stop state are referred to as a transition time (Transition Time). By shortening the transition time, the power consumption and various interferences of the base station apparatus 3 can be reduced.

Whether or not the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state transitions to the activated state includes, for example, an uplink reference signal from the terminal apparatus 1, cell detection information from the terminal apparatus 1, and physical layer information from the terminal apparatus 1. It is determined based on measurement information.

An example of a procedure in which the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state transitions to the activated state based on the physical layer measurement information will be described.

The base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal apparatus 1 is connected and the stopped base station apparatus 3 (adjacent cell) share the DRS settings via the backhaul. Further, the serving cell notifies the terminal device 1 of the setting of the DRS. The neighboring cell transmits DRS. The terminal device 1 detects the DRS transmitted from the neighboring cell based on the DRS setting notified from the serving cell. Further, the terminal device 1 performs physical layer measurement using the DRS transmitted from the adjacent cell. The terminal device 1 reports the measurement to the serving cell. If the serving cell determines whether or not to transition the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state to the activated state based on the measurement report from the terminal device 1, and determines to transition to the activated state Information indicating start-up is notified to the base station apparatus 3 in a stopped state via the backhaul. Note that the determination as to whether or not to change the stop state to the start state and the transmission of information instructing the start may not be performed by the serving cell, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), S-GW (Serving 決定 Gateway) may be determined and transmitted. A neighboring cell that has received information instructing activation transitions from a stopped state to an activated state.

An example of a procedure in which the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state based on the physical layer measurement information transitions to the activated state will be described.

The base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal apparatus is connected and the base station apparatus 3 (adjacent cell) in a stopped state share the SRS setting of the terminal apparatus 1 via the backhaul. Further, the serving cell notifies the terminal device 1 of the setting of the SRS. The terminal device 1 transmits the SRS based on the setting of the SRS or the instruction of the SRS request. The neighboring cell detects the SRS transmitted from the terminal device 1. Further, the adjacent cell performs physical layer measurement using the SRS transmitted from the terminal device 1. Based on the measurement result by SRS, the adjacent cell determines whether or not to shift the base station device 3 to the activated state, and transitions from the stopped state to the activated state. The determination as to whether or not to change the stop state to the start state does not have to be performed in the neighboring cell. For example, the determination is performed by the serving cell, MME (Mobility Management Entity), and S-GW (Serving Gateway). May be sent. In this case, the neighboring cell performs measurement of the physical layer using the SRS, and then transmits the measurement result to the serving cell, the MME, and the S-GW, and receives information instructing activation.

The serving cell may notify the terminal device 1 of information indicating the activation / deactivation state of surrounding cells. The terminal device 1 switches the behavior of the terminal device 1 by recognizing the start state or the stop state of the cell. The behavior of the terminal device 1 is, for example, an interference measurement method.

An example of a method for notifying cell state information (information indicating a cell start / stop state) will be described.

Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell is notified by L1 signaling (Layer 1 signaling). In other words, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell is notified by PDCCH or EPDCCH. One bit corresponding to the target cell is assigned, 0 (false, disable) indicates stop, and 1 (true, enable) indicates activation. Bits corresponding to the target cell may be configured as an aggregated bitmap, and a plurality of cells may be notified of activation / deactivation states at the same time. The association between the bit and the target cell is notified by dedicated RRC signaling.

Information indicating the start / stop state is notified in downlink control information (DCI: Downlink Control Information) format 1C. Information indicating the start / stop state may be notified in the DCI format 3 / 3A. Note that the information indicating the start / stop state may be notified in the same payload size (number of bits) format as the DCI format 1C.

Next, the DCI format will be described.

The DCI format includes a DCI format related to uplink scheduling and a DCI format related to downlink scheduling. A DCI format related to uplink scheduling is called an uplink grant, and a DCI format related to downlink scheduling is called a downlink grant (downlink assignment). One DCI format may be transmitted to a plurality of terminal devices 1. For example, when transmitting only the transmission power control command (TPC command: “Transmission“ Power Control ”command), the command may be transmitted to a plurality of terminal devices 1 in a batch. Such scheduling (or triggering) is called group scheduling (group triggering). The terminal device 1 is individually assigned an index and detects bits based on the index.

DCI format 0 is used for PUSCH scheduling in one uplink cell.

DCI format 1 is used for scheduling one PDSCH codeword in one cell.

DCI format 1A is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell and random access processing started by PDCCH order. DCI corresponding to the PDCCH order may be transmitted by PDCCH or EPDCCH. The DCI format 0 and the DCI format 1A can be transmitted using the same bit information field. Based on the value indicated in a certain bit field, the terminal device 1 has a DCI format mapped to the received bit information field. It is determined whether it is DCI format 0 or DCI format 1A.

DCI format 1B is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell with precoding information.

The DCI format 1C is used for notifying a change (change) of a multicast control channel (MCCH: “Multicast Control Channel”) and for performing compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword. Further, the DCI format 1C may be used for notifying a random access response by being scrambled using RA-RNTI (Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier). Here, compact scheduling refers to, for example, scheduling a narrow bandwidth PDSCH. The DCI format size is determined depending on the bandwidth used for the PDSCH that performs scheduling. If the bandwidth is narrow, the required DCI format size can also be reduced. Also, the DCI format 1C is scrambled using an RNTI (eg, eIMTA-RNTI) related to dynamic TDD (first type (mode) TDD), so that information indicating the TDD UL-DL setting is set. Also good. If the dynamic TDD is a first type (mode) TDD, the conventional TDD is referred to as a second type (mode) TDD.

Dynamic TDD refers to TDD that switches TDD UL-DL settings using L1 signaling according to uplink / downlink communication status. Dynamic TDD is also used to extend interference management and adaptive traffic control. The dynamic TDD may be referred to as eIMTA (enhanced Interference Management and Traffic Management) or TDD-ModeA.

DCI format 1D is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell with information on precoding and power offset.

DCI format 2 / 2A / 2B / 2C / 2D is used not only for scheduling one PDSCH codeword but also for scheduling two (or multiple) PDSCH codewords.

DCI format 3 / 3A indicates the value of a transmission power control command for adjusting the transmission power of PUSCH or PUCCH for a plurality of terminal devices 1. The terminal device 1 can detect the value of the transmission power control command corresponding to the PUSCH or the PUCCH by detecting the bit information corresponding to the index (TPC-Index) assigned to the own station. Also, in DCI format 3 / 3A, it is determined whether a transmission power control command for PUSCH or a transmission power control command for PUCCH is indicated according to the type of scrambled RNTI.

DCI format 4 is used for PUSCH scheduling in one uplink cell with multi-antenna port transmission mode.

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is used to detect DCI transmission errors. The CRC is scrambled with each RNTI.

CRC parity bits include C-RNTI (Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), SPS C-RNTI (Semi-Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), SI-RNTI (System Information Radio Network Temporary Identifier), P-RNTI ( Paging-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), RA-RNTI (Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), TPC-PUCCH-RNTI (Transmit Power Control-Physical Uplink Control Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), TPC-PUSCH-RNTI (Transmit It is scrambled by Control-Physical Uplink Shared Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier, temporary C-RNTI, M-RNTI (MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Services) -Radio Network Temporary Identifier), or TDD-Mode A-RNTI.

C-RNTI and SPS C-RNTI are identifiers for identifying the terminal device 1 in the cell. C-RNTI is used to control PDSCH or PUSCH in a single subframe.

SPS C-RNTI is used to periodically allocate PDSCH or PUSCH resources. A control channel having a CRC scrambled by SI-RNTI is used to control SIB (System Information Block).

The control channel with CRC scrambled with P-RNTI is used to control paging.

A control channel having a CRC scrambled with RA-RNTI is used to control a response to RACH.

A control channel having a CRC scrambled by TPC-PUCCH-RNTI is used for power control of PUCCH. A control channel having a CRC scrambled by TPC-PUSCH-RNTI is used to perform power control of PUSCH.

A control channel having a CRC scrambled with a temporary C-RNTI is used for a terminal device not identified by the C-RNTI.

A control channel having a CRC scrambled with M-RNTI is used to control MBMS.

The control channel having the CRC scrambled by TDD-ModeA-RNTI is used to notify the terminal device 1 of the TDD UL / DL setting information of each TDD serving cell in dynamic TDD.

Note that the DCI format may be scrambled using a new RNTI, not limited to the above RNTI.

Hereinafter, the details of PDCCH or EPDCCH will be described.

The control area of each serving cell is composed of a set of CCEs. CCEs are numbered from 0 to N _{CCE, k} -1. Here, N _{CCE, k} is the total number of CCEs in the control region of subframe k.

The terminal device 1 monitors a set of PDCCH candidates of one or more activated serving cells set by control layer information through higher layer signaling. Here, monitoring means trying to decode each PDCCH in the set corresponding to all monitored DCI formats.

A set of PDCCH candidates to be monitored is called a search space. In the search space, a shared search space (CSS) and a terminal-specific search space (USS) are defined.

CSS (Common Search Space) is a search space set using parameters specific to the base station apparatus 3 (cell, transmission point) and / or parameters defined in advance. For example, CSS is a search space that can be used in common by a plurality of terminal devices. Therefore, the base station apparatus 3 can reduce resources for transmitting a control channel by mapping a common control channel to a CSS in a plurality of terminal apparatuses.

The USS (UE-specific Search Space) is a search space set using at least parameters specific to the terminal device 1. Therefore, since the USS can individually transmit a control channel specific to the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can efficiently control the terminal device 1.

Note that the CSS may be set by further using parameters unique to the terminal device 1. In that case, it is preferable that the parameters unique to the terminal device 1 are set to have the same value among the plurality of terminal devices. Even when the CSS is set using parameters specific to the terminal device 1, the CSS is common among a plurality of terminal devices set to the same parameter. For example, the unit set to the same parameter among a plurality of terminal devices is a cell, a transmission point, a UE group, and the like. Since a plurality of terminal devices set to the same parameter can receive a common control channel mapped to the CSS, resources for transmitting the control channel can be reduced. Such a search space may be referred to as USS instead of CSS. That is, a USS that is a search space common to a plurality of terminal devices may be set. A USS unique to one terminal device is also referred to as a first USS, and a USS common to a plurality of terminal devices is also referred to as a second USS.

The search space S ^(L) _{k for} each aggregation level is defined by a set of PDCCH candidates. The number of CCEs used for one PDCCH is also referred to as an aggregation level. The number of CCEs used for one PDCCH is 1, 2, 4 or 8. In each serving cell where the PDCCH is monitored, the CCE corresponding to the PDCCH candidate of the search space S ^(L) _k is given by Equation (1) in FIG. Here, Y _k indicates a value in subframe k. In CSS, m ′ = m. In a serving cell where PDCCH is monitored in USS of PDCCH, when CIF (Carrier Indicator Field) is set in terminal device 1 to be monitored, m ′ = m + M ^(L) · n _CI , otherwise m ′ = M. Here, m is a value from 0 to M ^(L) −1, and M ^(L) is the number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored in a predetermined search space. The value of CIF (Carrier Indicator Field) is the same as the cell index (for example, serving cell index (ServCellIndex), small cell index, on / off cell index, etc.).

In CSS, Y _k is a value defined in advance or a value determined based on a parameter specific to the base station apparatus 3, and is set to 0 for, for example, the aggregation levels L = 4 and L = 8 . In the terminal-specific search space S ^(L) _{k at the} aggregation level L, Y _k is a value specific to the terminal device 1 and is given by, for example, Y _k = (A · Y _k−1 ) modD. Here, the initial value Y ₋₁ of Y _{k is} the value of RNTI (eg, C-RNTI).

The aggregation level is defined for each search space. For example, in the CSS,

aggregation levels

4 and 8 are defined. For example, in USS,

aggregation levels

1, 2, 4, and 8 are defined.

The number of PDCCH candidates is defined at each aggregation level of each search space. For example, in CSS, the number of PDCCH candidates is 4 at aggregation level 4, and the number of PDCCH candidates is 2 at aggregation level 8. For example, in USS, the number of PDCCH candidates is 6 in aggregation 1, the number of PDCCH candidates is 6 in aggregation level 2, the number of PDCCH candidates is 2 in aggregation level 4, and the number of PDCCH candidates is in aggregation level 8. The number is two.

EPDCCH is transmitted using a set of one or more ECCE (Enhanced control channel element). Each ECCE is composed of a plurality of EREG (Enhanced resource element group). EREG is used to define the mapping of EPDCCH to resource elements. In each RB pair, 16 EREGs, numbered from 0 to 15, are defined. That is, EREG0 to EREG15 are defined in each RB pair. In each RB pair, EREG0 to EREG15 are periodically defined with priority given to the frequency direction with respect to resource elements other than resource elements to which predetermined signals and / or channels are mapped. For example, the resource element to which the demodulation reference signal associated with the EPDCCH transmitted through the antenna ports 107 to 110 is mapped does not define EREG.

The number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH depends on the EPDCCH format and is determined based on other parameters. The number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is also referred to as an aggregation level. For example, the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is determined based on the number of resource elements that can be used for EPDCCH transmission in one RB pair, the EPDCCH transmission method, and the like. For example, the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32. The number of EREGs used for one ECCE is determined based on the type of subframe and the type of cyclic prefix, and is 4 or 8. Distributed transmission (Distributed transmission) and localized transmission (Localized transmission) are supported as EPDCCH transmission methods.

EPDCCH can use distributed transmission or local transmission. Distributed transmission and local transmission differ in the mapping of ECCE to EREG and RB pairs. For example, in distributed transmission, one ECCE is configured using EREGs of a plurality of RB pairs. In local transmission, one ECCE is configured using one RB pair of EREGs.

The base station device 3 performs settings related to the EPDCCH for the terminal device 1. The terminal device 1 monitors a plurality of EPDCCHs based on the setting from the base station device 3. A set of RB pairs in which the terminal device 1 monitors the EPDCCH can be set. The set of RB pairs is also referred to as an EPDCCH set or an EPDCCH-PRB set. One or more EPDCCH sets can be set for one terminal device 1. Each EPDCCH set is composed of one or more RB pairs. Moreover, the setting regarding EPDCCH can be performed individually for each EPDCCH set.

The base station device 3 can set a predetermined number of EPDCCH sets for the terminal device 1. For example, up to two EPDCCH sets can be configured as EPDCCH set 0 and / or EPDCCH set 1. Each of the EPDCCH sets can be configured with a predetermined number of RB pairs. Each EPDCCH set constitutes one set of a plurality of ECCEs. The number of ECCEs configured in one EPDCCH set is determined based on the number of RB pairs set as the EPDCCH set and the number of EREGs used for one ECCE. When the number of ECCEs configured in one EPDCCH set is N, each EPDCCH set configures ECCEs numbered from 0 to N-1. For example, when the number of EREGs used for one ECCE is 4, an EPDCCH set composed of four RB pairs constitutes 16 ECCEs.

The EPDCCH candidates monitored by the terminal device 1 are defined based on the ECCE configured in the EPDCCH set. A set of EPDCCH candidates is defined as a search space (search area). A terminal-specific search space that is a search space unique to the terminal device 1 and a common search space that is a search space unique to the base station device 3 (cell, transmission point, UE group) are defined. The monitoring of the EPDCCH includes the terminal device 1 attempting to decode each of the EPDCCH candidates in the search space according to the DCI format to be monitored.

The terminal-specific search space ES ^(L) _k of the EPDCCH at the aggregation level Lε {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32} is defined by a set of EPDCCH candidates.

In the EPDCCH set, the ECCE corresponding to the EPDCCH candidate m of the search space ES ^(L) _k is given by Equation (2) in FIG.

Here, Y _{p, k} represents a value in EPDCCH set p and subframe k. Y _{p, k} can be set independently by the search space. In the case of the common search space, Y _{p, k} is a value unique to the base station apparatus 3 (cell). For example, in the case of the common search space, Y _{p, k} is a value defined in advance or a value determined based on a parameter unique to the base station apparatus 3. In the case of the terminal-specific search space, Y _{p, k} is a value specific to the terminal device 1 and is given by Y _{p, k} = (A · Y _{p, k−1} ) modD. For example, Y _{p, k} is determined based on a predetermined value, the subframe k, and the RNTI (eg, C-RNTI) of the terminal device 1. A plurality of common search spaces and / or a plurality of terminal-specific search spaces may be set in one EPDCCH set.

Here, b is b = n _CI when the CIF for the serving cell whose EPDCCH is monitored is set in the terminal device 1, and b = 0 otherwise.

The DCI format monitored by the terminal device 1 depends on the transmission mode set for each serving cell. In other words, the DCI format monitored by the terminal device 1 varies depending on the transmission mode. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 1 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 1. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 4 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 2. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 10 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 2D. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 1 is set monitors the DCI format 0. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 2 is set monitors DCI format 0 and DCI format 4.

The control region in which the PDCCH for the terminal device 1 is arranged is not notified, and the terminal device 1 decodes all DCI formats corresponding to all PDCCH candidates and transmission modes for all aggregation levels defined in each search space. Try. In other words, the terminal device 1 tries to decode in all aggregation levels, PDCCH candidates, and DCI formats that may be transmitted to the terminal device 1. Then, the terminal device 1 recognizes the PDCCH that has been successfully decoded as control information addressed to the terminal device 1. This is called blind decoding.

Note that even if the DCI format is different, if the bit size is the same, the number of decoding does not increase. For example, since the DCI format 0 and the DCI format 1A have the same bit size, two types of DCI formats can be decoded by one decoding.

For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 1 is set attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size DCI formats in the aggregation 4 and two PDCCH candidates in the aggregation 8 in the CSS. Attempts to decode DCI formats of two bit sizes. In the USS, the terminal apparatus 1 tries to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of DCI formats in aggregation 1 in aggregation 1, and tries to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of bit sizes in DCI format in aggregation 2. In aggregation 4, two PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size DCI formats are tried to be decoded. In aggregation 8, two PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size of DCI formats are tried to be decoded. That is, the terminal device 1 tries to decode PDCCH 44 times in one subframe.

For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 2 is set attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of DCI formats of bit sizes in the aggregation 4 in the CSS, and in the aggregation 8 to the two PDCCH candidates. Attempts to decode DCI formats of two bit sizes. In the USS, the terminal device 1 attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats in aggregation 1 in aggregation 1, and attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and three types of bit sizes in DCI format in aggregation 2. In aggregation 4, two PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats of bit sizes are tried to be decoded. In aggregation 8, two PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats of bit sizes are tried to be decoded. That is, the terminal device 1 tries PDCCH decoding 60 times in one subframe.

By blind decoding, the terminal device 1 can decode PDCCHs having different coding rates without prior information, and can efficiently transmit control information between the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1.

Note that monitoring CSS and / or USS means trying to detect PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in CSS and / or USS. Note that trying to detect PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in CSS and / or USS means performing PDCCH and / or EPDCCH detection processing in CSS and / or USS. Note that trying to detect PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in CSS and / or USS means trying to decode the DCI format in CSS and / or USS.

For the sake of explanation, USS that monitors PDCCH is referred to as PDCCH USS, and USS that monitors EPDCCH is referred to as EPDCCH USS. In addition, EPDCCH may be monitored in PDCCH USS, and PDCCH may be monitored in EPDCCH USS. Note that the term “USS” is not limited to either USS for monitoring PDCCH or USS for monitoring EPDCCH. That is, when simply referred to as USS, EPDCCH may be monitored or PDCCH may be monitored.

The terminal apparatus 1 must monitor one CSS in all non-DRX subframes at

aggregation levels

4 and 8 on the primary cell.

When the PMCH decoding is set by the higher layer, the terminal device 1 must monitor the CSS on the cell for decoding the PDCCH necessary for decoding the PMCH on the cell. In addition, it is preferable that PMCH decoding is not set by an upper layer in an unlicensed band cell. That is, it is preferable that the processing is applied to cells other than the unlicensed band.

When the terminal device 1 is not configured for EPDCCH monitoring, and when the carrier indicator field is not configured in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 is activated for each non-DRX subframe. One PDCCH USS must be monitored at each of the

aggregation levels

1, 2, 4, and 8 on the serving cell.

When the terminal device 1 is not set for EPDCCH monitoring and when the carrier indicator field is set for the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 performs the upper layer signaling in all non-DRX subframes. One or more USS must be monitored at each

aggregation level

1, 2, 4, 8 on one or more activated serving cells configured.

When the terminal device 1 is set for EPDCCH monitoring on one serving cell, when the serving cell is activated, and when the carrier indicator field is not set in the terminal device 1, Device 1 must monitor one PDCCH USS at each of

aggregation levels

1, 2, 4, and 8 on the serving cell in all non-DRX subframes where EPDCCH is not monitored on the serving cell.

When the terminal device 1 is configured for EPDCCH monitoring on one serving cell, when the serving cell is activated, and when the carrier indicator field is configured in the terminal device 1, The device 1 has one or more PDCCH USSs at each of the

aggregation levels

1, 2, 4 and 8 on the serving cell configured by higher layer signaling in all non-DRX subframes where the EPDCCH is not monitored on the serving cell. Must be monitored.

That is, EPDCCH USS is monitored in a subframe where EPDCCH monitoring is set, and PDCCH USS is monitored in a subframe where EPDCCH monitoring is not set. In other words, PDCCH USS is not monitored in a subframe where EPDCCH monitoring is set, and EPDCCH USS is not monitored in a subframe where EPDCCH monitoring is not set.

The CSS and PDCCH USS on the primary cell may overlap. That is, the CSS and PDCCH USS on the primary cell may share the CCE.

The terminal device 1 in which the CIF associated with the monitoring of the PDCCH in the serving cell c is set, the CDC is set in the PDCCH USS of the serving cell c, and the PDCCH with the CRC scrambled in the C-RNTI Must be monitored. Note that monitoring a PDCCH with a CRC that is set with CIF and scrambled with C-RNTI is a payload size in which a bit for CIF (eg, 3 bits) is included in the DCI format, and C Try to detect PDCCH masked with CRC scrambled with RNTI (try to decode DCI format).

The terminal device 1 in which the CIF associated with the monitoring of the PDCCH in the primary cell is set, the PDCCH with the CRC set in the CIF in the primary cell PDCCH USS and scrambled with the SPS C-RNTI. Must be monitored. Note that monitoring the PDCCH with CRC that is set with CIF and scrambled with SPS C-RNTI is a payload size in which a bit for CIF (eg, 3 bits) is included in the DCI format, and An attempt is made to detect a PDCCH masked by a CRC scrambled by the SPS C-RNTI (an attempt to decode the DCI format).

Note that the setting of CIF means that the terminal device 1 attempts to decode the DCI format on the assumption that the DCI format has a payload size including bits for CIF (for example, 3 bits).

Note that the setting of CIF means that the terminal device 1 receives a parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether or not CIF is included in the DCI format transmitted in the primary cell.

Note that the setting of CIF means that the terminal device 1 receives a parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) related to cross carrier scheduling for each secondary cell.

The parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) includes a parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) indicating whether the first PDCCH corresponding to the related secondary cell is transmitted in the secondary cell or another serving cell.

When the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) indicates that the first PDCCH corresponding to the associated secondary cell is transmitted in the secondary cell, the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) is the DCI transmitted in the secondary cell. A parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether CIF is included in the format (downlink assignment, uplink grant) is included.

If the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) indicates that the first PDCCH corresponding to the associated secondary cell is transmitted in another serving cell, the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) is the downlink for the associated secondary cell. A parameter (schedulingCellId) indicating the allocation and in which serving cell the uplink grant is sent is included.

The terminal device 1 must monitor CSS for PDCCH without CIF. That is, in the CSS, the terminal device 1 tries to detect a PDCCH having a payload size that does not include a CIF bit (for example, 3 bits) in the DCI format (try to decode the DCI format).

Note that the CIF is not set means that the terminal device 1 does not receive a parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether CIF is included in the DCI format transmitted in the primary cell.

Note that the CIF is not set means that the terminal device 1 does not receive a parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) related to cross carrier scheduling for each secondary cell.

In a serving cell in which PDCCH is monitored, if CIF is not set in terminal device 1, terminal device 1 must monitor PDCCH USS for PDCCH without CIF. That is, in the serving cell in which the PDCCH is monitored, when the CIF is not set in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 uses the PDCCH that is a payload size that does not include a bit for CIF (for example, 3 bits) in the DCI format. Detection must be attempted (DCI format decoding must be attempted).

In a serving cell where PDCCH is monitored, when CIF is set in terminal device 1, terminal device 1 must monitor PDCCH USS for PDCCH accompanied by CIF. That is, in the serving cell where PDCCH is monitored, when CIF is set in terminal apparatus 1, terminal apparatus 1 detects PDCCH that is a payload size in which a bit for CIF (for example, 3 bits) is included in the DCI format. Must try (must try to decode the DCI format).

When the terminal device 1 is set to monitor the PDCCH with the CIF corresponding to the secondary cell in another serving cell, the terminal device 1 does not expect to monitor the PDCCH of the secondary cell. That is, when the terminal device 1 transmits a PDCCH corresponding to the secondary cell in another serving cell (when cross-carrier scheduling for the secondary cell is set from the other serving cell), the terminal device 1 is on the secondary cell. Therefore, the PDCCH for the secondary cell is not expected to be transmitted.

In the serving cell where the PDCCH is monitored, the terminal device 1 must monitor at least the PDCCH candidates for the same serving cell. That is, when the cross-carrier scheduling for the serving cell is not set, the terminal device 1 must monitor the PDCCH for the serving cell at least on the serving cell.

CSS and PDCCH USS on primary cell with CRC scrambled with C-RNTI or SPS C-RNTI, with a common payload size and with the same first CCE index, but with DCI information field The terminal device 1 configured to monitor the PDCCH candidate with a different set, the primary cell transmitted by the primary cell when the CIF established in connection with PDCCH monitoring on the primary cell is configured in the terminal device 1 Only PDCCH in CSS of PDCCH is assumed to be a PDCCH candidate with CRC scrambled with C-RNTI or SPS C-RNTI, otherwise transmitted by primary cell Only PDCCH in USS, assumed to be PDCCH candidates with C-RNTI or CRC that is scrambled by the SPS C-RNTI. That is, when the CSS on the primary cell and the PDCCH USS overlap, when the terminal device 1 is configured with the CIF related to the PDCCH monitoring on the primary cell (PDCCH monitoring with CIF in the primary cell) Is assumed to be a PDCCH detected by CSS, and in other cases (when PDCCH monitoring with CIF is not set in the primary cell), it is assumed to be a PDCCH detected by USS. .

For example, DCI formats with a common payload size and different sets of DCI information fields are DCI format 1 and DCI format 1A. For example, DCI formats 1 and 4 are DCI formats with a common payload size and different sets of DCI information fields.

PDCCH candidate in a predetermined serving cell with a predetermined DCI format size with CIF and with a CRC scrambled with C-RNTI (where the PDCCH candidate is a CIF for the predetermined DCI format size) The terminal device 1 in which the monitor of the predetermined DCI format size is set to the arbitrary value of the PDCCH USS corresponding to the arbitrary value of the CIF for the predetermined DCI format size. Suppose that it is a PDCCH candidate with the predetermined DCI format size transmitted in a predetermined serving cell.

That is, in a predetermined serving cell in which PDCCH monitoring with CIF is set, a PDCCH candidate is transmitted by the PDCCH USS corresponding to the CIF value on the predetermined serving cell. For example, a DCI format in which “1” is set in CIF is transmitted by PDCCH USS corresponding to CIF = 1 on a predetermined serving cell, and a DCI format in which “2” is set in CIF is on a predetermined serving cell. It is transmitted by PDCCH USS corresponding to CIF = 2.

That is, in a predetermined serving cell in which PDCCH monitoring with CIF is set, a PDCCH candidate is transmitted by the PDCCH USS corresponding to the CIF value on the predetermined serving cell. However, if there are multiple CIF values that can be taken for a given DCI format size in a given serving cell for which PDCCH monitoring with CIF is set, the PDCCH candidate corresponds to the CIF value on the given serving cell. The transmission is not limited to PDCCH USS, and any of PDCCH USS on a predetermined serving cell corresponding to the plurality of possible CIF values can be transmitted. For example, if the DCI format size of the DCI format with CIF set to “1” and the DCI format with CIF set to “2” is the same, the DCI format with CIF set to “1” The DCI format that is transmitted by PDCCH USS corresponding to CIF = 1 on the serving cell or PDCCH USS corresponding to CIF = 2 on the predetermined serving cell and set to “2” in CIF is CIF = 2 on the predetermined serving cell. Or PDCCH USS corresponding to CIF = 1 on a predetermined serving cell.

Monitoring the first PDCCH with CIF means trying to decode the first PDCCH according to the DCI format including CIF. CIF is a field to which a carrier indicator is mapped. The value of the carrier indicator indicates the serving cell corresponding to the DCI format to which the carrier indicator relates.

The terminal apparatus 1 configured to monitor the first PDCCH with CIF corresponding to the serving cell in another serving cell monitors the first PDCCH with CIF in the other serving cell.

In another serving cell, the terminal device 1 that is not set to monitor the first PDCCH with the CIF corresponding to the serving cell monitors the first PDCCH with or without the CIF in the serving cell. .

The first PDCCH for the primary cell is transmitted in the primary cell.

The base station apparatus 3 transmits to the terminal apparatus 1 a parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether CIF is included in the DCI format transmitted in the primary cell.

The base station device 3 transmits a parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) related to cross carrier scheduling to the terminal device 1 for each of the secondary cells.

Describing downlink HARQ operation.

There is one HARQ entity in the MAC entity for each service serving cell that maintains the number of parallel HARQ processes. Each HARQ process is associated with a HARQ process identifier (HARQ process identifier). When the HARQ entity indicates HARQ information (HARQ information), it is assumed that the related transport block (TB: Transport Block) is received on the DL-SCH corresponding to the HARQ process.

It should be noted that the value of the HARQ process identifier (HARQ process identifier) is preferably mapped (set) to a DCI format field (HARQ process number) and carried by the DCI format field (HARQ process number). The field (HARQHAprocess number) is preferably present in the DCI format including downlink assignment. That is, it is preferable that the field (HARQ） process number) does not exist in the DCI format including the uplink assignment. The downlink assignment is preferably resource assignment for PDSCH. The uplink assignment is preferably resource assignment for PUSCH.

The HARQ information (HARQ information) preferably includes at least information related to NDI (New Data indicator). The HARQ information (HARQ information) preferably includes at least information related to redundancy version.

When SCG is set in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 may apply the procedure described in this paper for both MCG and SCG unless otherwise specified.

If the procedure is applied for MCG, the terms “secondary cell”, “multiple secondary cells”, “serving cell”, “multiple serving cells” belong to the secondary cell, MCG, unless otherwise specified A plurality of secondary cells, a serving cell belonging to the MCG, and a plurality of serving cells belonging to the MCG may be referred to. The terms “subframe” and “multiple subframes” may refer to subframes belonging to MCG and multiple subframes belonging to MCG.

If the procedure is applied for SCG, the terms “secondary cell”, “multiple secondary cells”, “serving cells”, “multiple serving cells” belong to the secondary cell, SCG, unless specified otherwise A plurality of secondary cells (not including pSCell (primary secondary cell)), a serving cell belonging to SCG, and a plurality of serving cells belonging to SCG may be referred to. The term “primary cell” may refer to an SCG pSCell (primary secondary cell). The terms “subframe” and “multiple subframes” may refer to subframes belonging to MCG and multiple subframes belonging to SCG.

For FDD, there must be a maximum of 8 downlink HARQ processes per serving cell. That is, for FDD, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes per serving cell must be 8.

When one serving cell is set in the mobile station apparatus 1 for TDD, or when multiple serving cells are set in the mobile station apparatus 1 and all the set serving cells have the same TDD UL / DL configuration, The maximum number of downlink HARQ processes per serving cell must be determined by TDD UL / DL configuration. When TDD UL / DL configuration is 0, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 4, when TDD UL / DL configuration is 1, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 7, and when TDD UL / DL configuration is 2, downlink HARQ If the maximum number of processes is 10, TDD UL / DL configuration is 3, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 9, If the TDD UL / DL configuration is 4, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 12, TDD UL / DL configuration When the number is 5, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 15, and when the TDD UL / DL configuration is 6, the downlink HA The maximum number of Q process may be a 6,.

For TDD, when a plurality of serving cells are configured in the mobile station apparatus 1 and the TDD UL / DL configuration of the configured at least two serving cells is different, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes for each serving cell is determined for the serving cell. Must be determined by DL-reference UL / DL configuration. If DL-reference UL / DL configuration is 0, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 4, If DL-reference UL / DL configuration is 1, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 7, DL-reference UL / DL configuration is In the case of 2, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 10, when DL-reference UL / DL configuration is 3, the maximum number of downlink HARQ processes is 9, and when DL-reference UL / DL configuration is 4, the number of downlink HARQ processes The maximum number is 12 and DL-reference UL / DL configuration is 5 The maximum number of click HARQ process 15, when DL-reference UL / DL configuration of 6 maximum number of downlink HARQ processes may be 6,.

Dedicated broadcast HARQ processes are not counted as part of the maximum number of HARQ processes for both FDD and TDD.

If the physical layer is configured for downlink spatial multiplexing, one or two TBs are expected per subframe and they are associated with the same HARQ process. Otherwise, one TB is expected for each subframe.

TTI (Transmission Time Interval) which is the minimum unit of scheduling is one subframe, and a resource block for the terminal device 1 selected by scheduling is assigned to each subframe.

If a downlink assignment is indicated for this TTI, the MAC entity shall specify the HARQ information associated with the HARQ process indicated by the TB (or multiple TBs) received from the physical layer and the associated HARQ information. Assign.

If a downlink assignment is indicated for a broadcast HARQ process, the MAC entity assigns the received TB to the broadcast HARQ process.

In the case of BCCH, the Dedicated broadcast HARQ process is used.

For each subframe in which transmission for the HARQ process takes place, one or two TBs (if the physical layer is configured for downlink spatial multiplexing) and the associated HARQ information from the HARQ entity Received.

For each received TB and the associated HARQ information, the HARQ process performs the previously received transmission (transmission signal from the base station apparatus 3) corresponding to this TB when NDI (New Data Indicator) is provided. If it is toggled relative to the value of NDI, this transmission is considered a new transmission. Otherwise, consider this transmission as a retransmission. Note that when the NDI value is toggled compared to the previously received NDI value corresponding to this TB, the NDI value is switched from 0 to 1, or the NDI value is switched from 1 to 0. Means that

For each received TB and associated HARQ information, the HARQ process
If the HARQ process is equal to the broadcast process and is the first received transmission for a TB according to the schedule of system information indicated by the RRC, this transmission is considered a new transmission. Otherwise, consider this transmission as a retransmission.

For each received TB and associated HARQ information, the HARQ process
If it is the very first received transmission for a TB (eg, if no NDI is provided for this TB), consider this transmission a new transmission. Otherwise, consider this transmission as a retransmission.

The MAC entity must perform the following processing after considering a new transmission or retransmission.

If it is a new transmission, the MAC entity tries to decode the received data.

If it is a retransmission, the MAC entity combines the received data with the current data in the soft buffer for this TB, if the data for that TB has not been successfully decoded, and combines Attempt to decode the generated data.

If the data that the MAC entity tried to decode was successfully decoded for that TB, and if the HARQ process is equal to the broadcast process, deliver the decoded MAC PDU to the upper layer (upper layer). Then, a positive acknowledgment (ACK) of the data in the TB is generated. Otherwise, the MAC entity replaces the data in the soft buffer for that TB with the data it tried to decode. Then, a negative acknowledgment (NACK) of the data in the TB is generated.

If the data that the MAC entity attempted to decode was successfully decoded for that TB, and if this is the first successful decoding of the data for that TB, the decoded MAC PDUs are disassembled and demultiplexing entities Deliver to Then, a positive acknowledgment (ACK) of the data in the TB is generated. Otherwise, the MAC entity replaces the data in the soft buffer for that TB with the data it tried to decode. Then, a negative acknowledgment (NACK) of the data in the TB is generated.

If the HARQ process is associated with the transmission indicated by the Temporary C-RNTI and the Contention Resolution is not yet successful, it does not indicate an ACK or NACK generated to the physical layer. Otherwise, indicate an ACK for that TB generated in the physical layer or a NACK for that TB generated.

If the HARQ process is equal to the broadcast process, it does not indicate the generated ACK or generated NACK in the physical layer. Otherwise, indicate an ACK for that TB generated in the physical layer or a NACK for that TB generated.

If the timeAlignTimer associated with the pTAG is stopped or expired, no ACK generated or NACK generated is shown in the physical layer. Otherwise, indicate an ACK for that TB generated in the physical layer or a NACK for that TB generated.

The MAC entity is received in all downlink assignments on the PDCCH for the Temporary C-RNTI when the NDI on the PDCCH for the C-RNTI is toggled compared to the NDI value of the previous transmission. NDI must be ignored. Note that the NDI on the PDCCH for C-RNTI is toggled compared to the NDI value of the previous transmission when the NDI value is switched from 0 to 1 or the NDI value is It means the case where it is switched from 1 to 0.

As described above, retransmission data from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 can be transmitted only from the cell that transmitted the initial transmission data in the current LTE HARQ. If the unlicensed band is not available (when the unlicensed band is occupied by communication in another wireless communication system using the same frequency), communication in the cell of the unlicensed band cannot be performed. That is, when retransmission data is transmitted in a cell of an unlicensed band, the retransmission data cannot be transmitted until the unlicensed band becomes available. In such a situation, it takes a long time to transmit data from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1, which causes a significant deterioration in transmission efficiency.

That is, in the current LTE, when the base station apparatus 3 aggregates and uses at least the first serving cell and the second serving cell for downlink transmission to the terminal apparatus 1, the downlink station via the PDSCH in the second serving cell is used. Transmit initial transmission data (data for the transport block) (transmit new transmission to the terminal device 1), and transmit downlink retransmission data for the downlink initial transmission data (retransmission for the new transmission) This cannot be done via the PDSCH in the first serving cell. In other words, transmission of downlink retransmission data for the downlink initial transmission data (retransmission for the new transmission) is possible only via the PDSCH in the second serving cell.

That is, when the first serving cell is a serving cell in the license band and the second serving cell is a serving cell in the unlicensed band, the downlink initial transmission data is transmitted via the PDSCH in the unlicensed serving cell (terminal device) Transmission of downlink retransmission data for the downlink initial transmission data (retransmission for the new transmission) cannot be performed via the PDSCH in the serving cell of the license band. Considering that LBT (Carrier Sense, CCA) is required for downlink transmission in the serving cell of the unlicensed band, if the unlicensed band is occupied by another radio system, the downlink This means that the retransmission data transmission is delayed.

Measures for solving the above problems will be described.

When the base station apparatus 3 aggregates and uses at least the first serving cell and the second serving cell for downlink transmission to the terminal apparatus 1, downlink initial transmission data (transport block) via the PDSCH in the second serving cell ) Is transmitted (transmitting new transmission to the terminal device 1), and downlink retransmission data is transmitted to the downlink initial transmission data (retransmission for the new transmission) via the PDSCH in the first serving cell. .

In other words, the PDSCH for the initial transmission data in the second serving cell is transmitted, and the transport block for the retransmission data corresponding to the initial transmission data is transmitted via the PDSCH in the first serving cell.

When at least the first serving cell and the second serving cell are aggregated in the terminal device 1, the downlink initial transmission data is received via the PDSCH in the second serving cell (new transmission is received from the base station device 3). Receiving downlink retransmission data for the downlink initial transmission data (retransmission for the new transmission) is performed via the PDSCH in the first serving cell.

In other words, the PDSCH for the initial transmission data in the second serving cell is received, and the transport block for the retransmission data corresponding to the initial transmission data is received via the PDSCH in the first serving cell.

The first serving cell is preferably a license band serving cell (non-LAA serving cell). The first serving cell is preferably a license cell primary cell. Note that the first serving cell is preferably a primary secondary cell of a license band. The first serving cell is preferably a license cell secondary cell. The second serving cell is preferably an unlicensed band serving cell (LAA serving cell). The second serving cell is preferably an unlicensed band primary cell. Note that the second serving cell is preferably a primary secondary cell of an unlicensed band. Note that the second serving cell is preferably a secondary cell of an unlicensed band.

In addition, it is preferable that the resource for downlink transmission and the resource for uplink transmission exist in the 1st serving cell. Note that it is preferable that at least resources for downlink transmission exist in the second serving cell. That is, it is preferable whether or not resources for uplink transmission exist in the second serving cell.

Note that it is preferable to perform LBT (carrier sense, CCA) in downlink transmission in the second serving cell.

The first serving cell is preferably a serving cell for a license band, and the second serving cell is preferably a serving cell for an unlicensed band. The first serving cell is preferably an unlicensed band serving cell, and the second serving cell is preferably a license band serving cell. The first serving cell is preferably an unlicensed band serving cell, and the second serving cell is preferably an unlicensed band serving cell. The first serving cell is preferably a license band serving cell, and the second serving cell is preferably a license band serving cell.

In other words, reception of transport blocks for downlink retransmission data relative to transport blocks for downlink initial transmission data received in the first serving cell is possible only via PDSCH in the first serving cell. It is. That is, it is impossible to receive the downlink retransmission data for the downlink initial transmission data received via the PDSCH received at the first serving cell via the PDSCH at the second serving cell.

Note that the reception of initial transmission data is compared with the value of NDI of previously received transmission (transmission signal from base station apparatus 3) corresponding to this TB when NDI (New Data Indicator) is provided. If it is toggled, it is to receive data for this TB. In other words, if the NDI value associated with the received TB is toggled compared to the previously received NDI value, the received TB is a new transmission (initial transmission) from the base station apparatus 3. For example, when the NDI value related to the received TB is 0 and the previously received NDI value is 1, the received TB is a new transmission (initial transmission) from the base station apparatus 3. For example, if the NDI value related to the received TB is 1 and the previously received NDI value is 0, the received TB is a new transmission (initial transmission) from the base station apparatus 3.

Note that reception of initial transmission data means that if the HARQ process is equal to the broadcast process and is the first received transmission for TB according to the system information schedule indicated by RRC, this transmission is a new transmission (initial transmission). ).

Note that if the initial data reception is the very first received transmission for a TB (eg, if no NDI is provided for this TB), this transmission is a new transmission.

Note that the reception of the initial transmission data is the very first received transmission for the TB (for example, the first TB is received after the terminal device 1 is turned on). Is a new transmission.

Retransmission data reception means that when NDI (New Data Indicator) is provided, it is toggled by comparing with the NDI value of previously received transmission (transmission signal from base station apparatus 3) corresponding to this TB. If not, it is to receive data for this TB. In other words, if the NDI value associated with the received TB has not been toggled compared to the previously received NDI value, the received TB is retransmitted from the base station device 3 (the terminal device 1 has previously received). The base station apparatus 3 performs the same transmission as the transmission again). For example, if the NDI value related to the received TB is 0 and the previously received NDI value is 0, the received TB is a retransmission from the base station apparatus 3. For example, if the NDI value related to the received TB is 1, and the previously received NDI value is 1, the received TB is a retransmission from the base station apparatus 3.

Note that it is preferable that the terminal device 1 holds an NDI value related to at least one HARQ process for one HARQ process. Note that the NDI value held by the terminal device 1 is the most recently received value related to the HARQ process, and when a new NDI related to the HARQ process is received, the held NDI value is replaced (updated). Is preferable.

Note that the reception of retransmission data is a retransmission unless the HARQ process is equal to the broadcast process and is the first received transmission for a TB according to the schedule of system information indicated by the RRC.

It should be noted that this transmission is a re-transmission, except that the reception of retransmission data is the very first received transmission for TB.

Due to the above characteristics, when the first serving cell is a licensed band serving cell and the second serving cell is an unlicensed band serving cell, the downlink initial transmission data is transmitted via the PDSCH in the unlicensed serving cell ( New transmission to the terminal device 1 is transmitted), and downlink retransmission data transmission (retransmission for the new transmission) for the downlink initial transmission data can be performed via the PDSCH in the serving cell of the license band. Considering that LBT (Carrier Sense, CCA) is required for downlink transmission in the serving cell of the unlicensed band, this unlicensed band is used even when the unlicensed band is occupied by another radio system. This means that retransmission data for the license band can be performed in the serving cell of the license band. That is, it means that transmission of downlink retransmission data is not delayed.

For the sake of explanation, the case where the first serving cell and the second serving cell are aggregated will be described. However, the number of aggregated serving cells is not limited to two. That is, even when three or more serving cells are aggregated, the means for solving the problem is naturally applicable. For example, when x serving cells are aggregated, each of the aggregated serving cells may have the same characteristics as any of the first serving cell and the second serving cell. For example, when x serving cells are aggregated, each of the aggregated serving cells may be a license band serving cell or an unlicensed band serving cell.

An example of means for solving the problem will be described.

A description will be given using a case where at least the first serving cell and the second serving cell are aggregated in the terminal device 1. The first serving cell is preferably set to monitor PDCCH with CIF (CIF is set). The second serving cell is preferably set to self-scheduling.

It is assumed that PDCCH monitoring with CIF is set (CIF is set) is a payload size in which the terminal device 1 includes bits for CIF (for example, 3 bits) in the DCI format. And trying to decode the DCI format. Note that a DCI format including bits for CIF (for example, 3 bits) is transmitted in USS. That is, a DCI format including bits for CIF (for example, 3 bits) is not transmitted in CSS.

Note that self-scheduling is set for the serving cell means that the PDSCH on the serving cell is assigned by the PDCCH on the serving cell. In other words, the PDSCH on the serving cell is not assigned by the PDCCH on other serving cells. In other words, the PDSCH on the serving cell is not assigned by anything other than the PDCCH on the serving cell.

Note that the self-scheduling is set for the serving cell means that the PDCCH with CIF is not monitored in the USS on the serving cell. That is, the CIF associated with monitoring the PDCCH in the serving cell is not set in the terminal device 1.

Note that the self-scheduling of the serving cell may be configured to monitor the PDCCH with the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the serving cell in the USS on the serving cell. That is, the CIF associated with monitoring the PDCCH for the serving cell in the serving cell is not set in the terminal device 1.

Note that the setting of CIF means that the terminal device 1 receives a parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether or not CIF is included in the DCI format transmitted in the serving cell. That is, the fact that the CIF is not set means that the terminal device 1 does not receive a parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether or not the CIF is included in the DCI format transmitted in the serving cell.

Note that the setting of CIF means that the terminal device 1 receives a parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) related to cross carrier scheduling for the serving cell. That is, the fact that CIF is not set means that the terminal device 1 does not receive a parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) related to cross carrier scheduling for the serving cell. In addition, if the CIF is not set, the terminal device 1 receives a parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) related to cross carrier scheduling for the serving cell, and the serving cell is set by the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) included in the parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10). It is shown that the PDCCH for is transmitted by the serving cell.

The parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r10) includes a parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) indicating whether the first PDCCH corresponding to the related serving cell is transmitted in the serving cell or another serving cell.

When the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) indicates that the first PDCCH corresponding to the related serving cell is transmitted in the serving cell, the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) is the DCI format (downlink) transmitted in the serving cell. A parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether CIF is included in (link assignment, uplink grant).

If the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) indicates that the first PDCCH corresponding to the associated serving cell is transmitted in another serving cell, the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10) is a downlink assignment for the associated serving cell, And a parameter (schedulingCellId) indicating in which serving cell the uplink grant is transmitted.

The terminal device 1 receives initial transmission data (transport block) via the PDSCH on the second serving cell allocated by the PDCCH on the second serving cell, and the data (data for the transport block) If reception is successful, ACK is transmitted, and if reception of the data (data for the transport block) is not successful (failure), NACK is transmitted.

The terminal device 1 transmits data (transport) via the PDSCH on the first serving cell allocated by the PDCCH with the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell detected by the USS on the first serving cell. If (block) is received, it is assumed (determined) that the data is retransmission data for the initial transmission data transmitted in the second serving cell. In other words, the terminal device 1 receives the initial transmission for the first data via the PDSCH on the second serving cell allocated by the PDCCH on the second serving cell, and retransmits for the first data. Are received via the PDSCH on the first serving cell assigned by the PDCCH on the first serving cell. For the sake of explanation, this is referred to as cross carrier retransmission.

Further, the terminal device 1 is detected by CSS or USS on the second serving cell and satisfies the condition for determining the retransmission (for example, NDI is toggled compared to the previous reception) by the PDCCH. When data (data for the transport block) is received via the PDSCH on the assigned second serving cell, it is assumed that the data is retransmission data for the initial transmission data transmitted in the second serving cell. (to decide). In other words, the terminal device 1 receives the initial transmission for the first data via the PDSCH on the second serving cell allocated by the PDCCH on the second serving cell, and retransmits for the first data. Are received via the PDSCH on the second serving cell assigned by the PDCCH on the second serving cell. For the sake of explanation, this is referred to as self-carrier retransmission.

The CIF value for the serving cell is preferably the same as the serving cell index (ServCellIndex). For example, when the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the first serving cell is 0, the CIF value for the first serving cell is preferably 0, and when the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell is 1. The CIF value for the second serving cell is preferably 1.

Note that the USS on the first serving cell is preferably the USS for (corresponding to) the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the first serving cell. Note that the USS on the second serving cell is preferably the USS for (corresponding to) the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell. Note that the USS for (corresponding to) the CIF is the USS given by the expression (1) or (2) in FIG.

The PDCCH with the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell is obtained by setting the CIF value corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell in the DCI format received via the PDCCH. Preferably there is.

Note that a field (MCS field) in which information related to a modulation scheme and a coding method of a DCI format (DCI format transmitted via PDCCH on the first serving cell) used for cross-carrier retransmission is set is Preferably, it is used for modulation scheme indication. That is, it is preferable not to include information (TBS Index: サイズ Transport Block Size Index) related to indicating the size of TB. In other words, the TB size used for cross carrier retransmission is preferably the same as the TB size used for initial transmission.

In addition, it is preferable that the NDI field (field for setting NDI) of the DCI format (DCI format transmitted via PDCCH on the first serving cell) used for cross-carrier retransmission is reserved. It is preferable that no NDI for cross carrier retransmission is provided. Note that the NDI field (field for setting NDI) of the DCI format (DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH on the second serving cell) used for initial transmission corresponding to cross carrier retransmission is reserved. Preferably it is. Note that the NDI for the initial transmission corresponding to the cross carrier retransmission may not be provided.

Note that the payload size of the DCI format used for cross-carrier retransmission is preferably the same as the payload size of the DCI format transmitted by the USS on the first serving cell. That is, the payload size of the DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH with the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell detected by the USS on the first serving cell, and the USS on the first serving cell. It is preferable that the payload size of the DCI format transmitted via PDCCH with CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the first serving cell to be detected is the same. Note that the DCI format used for cross-carrier retransmission is preferably padded to make the payload size of the DCI format the same.

Note that the RNTI related to monitoring of PDCCH candidates for cross-carrier retransmission in the USS on the first serving cell and the RNTI related to monitoring of PDCCH candidates other than for cross-carrier retransmission in the USS on the first serving cell are Preferably they are different.

Note that the terminal device 1 may transmit a parameter (UECapabilityInformation) related to having a function related to cross carrier retransmission. The parameter related to having a function related to cross carrier retransmission is preferably set for each band.

Note that one HARQ entity exists in each serving cell, and one HARQ entity manages a plurality of HARQ processes. Then, the HARQ process number for each serving cell is set in a DCI format field (HARQ process number field) transmitted via the PDCCH and notified to the terminal device 1.

For example, the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the first serving cell is 0, that is, the CIF value for the first serving cell is 0, the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell is 1, that is, the CIF value for the second serving cell is 1. A description will be given using a case. The terminal device 1 is set in the PDCCH field (HARQ process number field) with CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell detected by the USS on the first serving cell. It is preferably assumed (determined) to be the HARQ process number for the HARQ entity of the serving cell. In other words, the terminal device 1 is set in the PDCCH field (HARQ process number field) with CIF = 1 detected in the USS for CIF = 0 on the first serving cell in the second serving cell. Preferably, it is assumed (determined) to be the HARQ process number for a given HARQ entity.

That is, it is preferable that a value related to the HARQ process number of the serving cell corresponding to the CIF value of the DCI format is set in the field (HARQ process number field) of the DCI format.

That is, the terminal apparatus 1 assumes which serving cell (HARQ entity) the notified HARQ process number corresponds to based on the CIF value of the DCI format and the value of the field (HARQ process number field) of the DCI format. (Judge) is preferable.

That is, based on the CIF value of the DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH and the value of the field (HARQ process number field) of the DCI format, it is indicated which serving cell's HARQ entity the PDCCH inherits. preferable.

That is, based on the CIF value of the DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH and the value of the field (HARQ process number field) of the DCI format, which serving cell (HARQ entity) the HARQ process of the PDCCH inherits Preferably indicated.

In addition, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 can simultaneously receive the reception of the cross carrier on the first serving cell and the reception of the TB on the second serving cell.

In addition, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 cannot simultaneously receive the reception of the cross carrier on the first serving cell and the reception of the TB on the second serving cell.

In addition, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 transmits a parameter (UECapabilityInformation) related to the ability of simultaneous reception of cross carrier retransmission on the first serving cell and simultaneous reception of TB on the second serving cell.

In addition, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 can simultaneously receive the reception of the cross carrier on the first serving cell and the reception of the TB on the first serving cell.

In addition, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 cannot simultaneously receive the reception of the cross carrier on the first serving cell and the reception of the TB on the first serving cell.

In addition, it is preferable that the terminal device 1 transmits a parameter (UECapabilityInformation) related to the reception capability of cross carrier retransmission on the first serving cell and the simultaneous reception capability of TB on the first serving cell.

In addition, when the base station apparatus 3 requires LBT for downlink transmission in the second serving cell, the channel is not free even after the LBT is executed x times in the second serving cell (other radios using the same band). It is preferable to perform cross-carrier retransmission when the system occupies bandwidth.

An example of means for solving the problem will be described.

A description will be given using a case where at least the first serving cell and the second serving cell are aggregated in the terminal device 1.

When the terminal device 1 receives data (transport block) via the PDSCH allocated by the specific PDCCH detected on the first serving cell, the data is the initial transmission data transmitted in the second serving cell. It is assumed (determined) that this is retransmission data. In other words, the terminal device 1 receives the initial transmission for the first data via the PDSCH on the second serving cell allocated by the PDCCH on the second serving cell, and retransmits for the first data. Are received via the PDSCH assigned by the specific PDCCH on the first serving cell. For the sake of explanation, this is referred to as cross carrier retransmission.

Note that the specific PDCCH is a value related to a cross-carrier retransmission instruction set in a specific field (for example, Retransmission / indication / field) of a DCI format (for example, DCI format x) received via the PDCCH. is there.

For example, the terminal device 1 detects a PDCCH with a DCI format in which a specific field (Retransmission indication field) is set to 1 on the first serving cell, and transmits data (transport) via the PDSCH assigned by the PDCCH. If (block) is received, it is assumed (determined) that the data is retransmission data for the initial transmission data transmitted in the second serving cell. That is, when 1 is set in a specific field (Retransmission indication field), the PDSCH assigned by the PDCCH is for retransmission data for the initial transmission data transmitted in the second serving cell. That is, when 0 is set in a specific field (Retransmission indication field), the PDSCH assigned by the PDCCH is not for retransmission data for the initial transmission data transmitted in the second serving cell.

Note that it is preferable that a specific field (Retransmission indication field) is not provided or reserved when cross-carrier retransmission is not performed.

In addition, when the serving cell which inherits a HARQ entity with respect to a serving cell is previously set by the upper layer etc., the specific field (Retransmission indication field) may instruct | indicate whether it inherits a HARQ entity. For example, when the higher layer is set to inherit the HARQ entity of the x-th serving cell from the first serving cell, the fact that 1 is set in the specific field (Retransmission indication field) May mean to inherit the HARQ entity of the serving cell (the PDSCH allocated by the PDCCH including the specific field is a retransmission for the initial transmission of the xth serving cell), and that 0 is set. It may mean that the HARQ entity of the xth serving cell is not inherited (the PDSCH allocated by the PDCCH including the specific field is not a retransmission for the initial transmission of the xth serving cell).

The specific PDCCH is set to a value related to the serving cell index of the serving cell that inherits the HARQ entity in a specific field (for example, HARQ entity indication field) of the DCI format (for example, DCI format x) received via the PDCCH. It has been done.

For example, the terminal device 1 detects a PDCCH with a DCI format in which a value related to an arbitrary serving cell index is set in a specific field (HARQ entity indication field) on the first serving cell, and is allocated by the PDCCH. When data (transport block) is received via the PDSCH, it is assumed (determined) that the data is retransmission data for the initial transmission data transmitted in the serving cell corresponding to the arbitrary serving cell index.

That is, based on the value of a specific field of the DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH, it may be indicated whether the PDCCH inherits the HARQ process of another serving cell (an HARQ entity of another serving cell). preferable. Note that other serving cells that inherit the HARQ entity are preferably set in advance by an upper layer.

That is, it is preferable to indicate which serving cell (HARQ entity) the HARQ process is inherited by the PDCCH based on the value of a specific field of the DCI format transmitted via the PDCCH.

Note that the field (MCS field) in which information related to the modulation system and coding method of the DCI format used for cross-carrier retransmission is set is preferably used for a modulation system indication. That is, it is preferable not to include information (TBS Index: サイズ Transport Block Size Index) related to indicating the size of TB. In other words, the TB size used for cross carrier retransmission is preferably the same as the TB size used for initial transmission.

An example of means for solving the problem will be described.

The terminal device 1 will be described in the case where a serving cell (serving cell that performs cross carrier retransmission) that inherits the HARQ entity from the serving cell is set in advance by an upper layer or the like.

The parameter related to the setting of the serving cell that inherits the HARQ entity is preferably included in the parameter related to cross carrier scheduling (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r13).

The parameter (CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-r13) is a parameter (for example, schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) indicating whether the PDCCH for retransmission corresponding to the related serving cell is transmitted in the serving cell or another serving cell. including.

If the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) indicates that the PDCCH for retransmission corresponding to the associated serving cell is transmitted in the serving cell, the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) A parameter (cif-Presence-r10) indicating whether CIF is included in the DCI format (downlink assignment, uplink grant) transmitted in the serving cell is included.

When the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) indicates that the PDCCH for retransmission corresponding to the related serving cell is transmitted in another serving cell, the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) is It includes a downlink allocation for the related serving cell and a parameter (schedulingCellId) indicating in which serving cell the uplink grant is sent.

If the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) indicates that the PDCCH for retransmission corresponding to the second serving cell is transmitted in the first serving cell, the terminal device 1 is on the first serving cell. When receiving data (transport block) via the PDSCH allocated by the PDCCH detected in the USS for (corresponding to) the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell of It is assumed (determined) that it is retransmission data for the initial transmission data transmitted in the second serving cell. In other words, the terminal device 1 receives the initial transmission for the first data via the PDSCH on the second serving cell allocated by the PDCCH on the second serving cell, and retransmits for the first data. Is received via the PDSCH allocated by the PDCCH detected in the USS for (corresponding to) the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell on the first serving cell. For the sake of explanation, this is referred to as cross carrier retransmission.

Note that the USS for (corresponding to) the CIF corresponding to the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) of the second serving cell on the first serving cell is monitored only when retransmission for the initial transmission of the second serving cell is expected. It is preferable. Note that the case where retransmission for the initial transmission of the second serving cell is expected is the case where data (data for the transport block) for the initial transmission of the second serving cell has not been successfully received (if it has failed). . That is, it is a case where NACK for data (data for transport block) for the initial transmission of the second serving cell is transmitted.

In addition, when the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) indicates that the PDCCH for retransmission corresponding to the related serving cell is transmitted in another serving cell, the PDCCH detected in the other serving cell is The PDCCH corresponding to the retransmission of the related serving cell may be used.

In addition, when the parameter (schedulingCellInfo-r10 or schedulingCellInfo-r13) indicates that the PDCCH for retransmission corresponding to the related serving cell is transmitted in another serving cell, the PDCCH detected in the other serving cell is A PDCCH corresponding to a retransmission of the associated serving cell and may indicate a PDSCH allocation on the associated serving cell.

Note that the USS for (corresponding to) the CIF is a USS given by the equation (1) or the equation (2) in FIG.

Information indicating the start / stop status is notified by the shared search space. A shared search space is a search space common to cells. Information indicating the start / stop state is notified by the terminal group shared search space. Here, the terminal group shared search space is a starting point of CCE in which PDCCH candidates are arranged using RNTI (UE-group C-RNTI, TP-specific-RNTI, SCE-RNTI) commonly allocated in the terminal group. Is a search space to be determined. The plurality of terminal devices 1 in which the terminal group RNTI is set detect the DCI format using the PDCCH arranged in the same search space.

The notification of the information indicating the start / stop state is performed at a predetermined timing or a set timing. For example, the notification timing is in units of one radio frame.

The notification of information indicating the start / stop state indicates information of the next radio frame that has received the L1 signaling. When L1 signaling is received in the first subframe (subframe 0) in the radio frame, information on the received radio frame may be indicated.

An example of a method for notifying information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state will be described.

The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by a change (change) in the DRS configuration. Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by the configuration of the DRS being different between the activation state and the deactivation state. The configuration of the DRS transmitted from the target cell may be transmitted differently between the activated state and the deactivated state. The terminal device 1 may receive from the base station device 3 information related to the DRS configuration transmitted in the activated state and information related to the DRS configuration transmitted in the deactivated state.

The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be indicated by a change (change) in a parameter (or parameter value) of a configuration with DRS. In other words, a certain parameter included in the setting of the DRS may be different between the activated state and the deactivated state (or may be individually set). For example, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different resource element arrangements. Further, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different antenna ports. Further, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different scramble sequences. Further, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different initial values or methods (formulas) for generating the initial value of the scramble sequence. Also, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission power. Also, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission subframe intervals. Further, the transmission bandwidth or the number of resource blocks may be different between the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state. That is, the information regarding the setting of DRS transmitted in the activated state and the information regarding the setting of DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may be individually set. Such information may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 using higher layer signaling. That is, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be parameter setting information related to the DRS configuration. In other words, a certain parameter is set for each of the activated state and the deactivated state.

Further, the terminal device 1 may monitor two types of configurations, that is, a DRS configuration indicating a start state and a DRS configuration indicating a stop state. The terminal device 1 may monitor two types using a DRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a start state and a DRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a stop state. In this case, the terminal device 1 is notified of information regarding the monitoring pattern of the two DRS configurations. That is, when information regarding a monitoring pattern of one DRS configuration is not notified, DRSs of two configurations may be monitored based on one monitoring pattern.

When measuring the DRS in the activated state during the measurement DRS of the stopped DRS, the terminal device 1 recognizes the small cell in the deactivated state as the activated state.

Further, the terminal device 1 may implicitly acquire the information on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell based on the monitoring pattern in which the DRS is detected. The monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the start state and the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the stop state may be defined in advance. The monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the start state and the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the stop state may be notified from the base station apparatus 3 by dedicated RRC signaling (upper layer signaling).

A description will be given of another example of a method for notifying information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state.

The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by the difference between the activation state and the deactivation state CRS configuration (CRS setting) of the target cell. In this case, the configuration of the CRS transmitted from the target cell differs between the activated state and the deactivated state. At that time, CRS setting information of a different configuration is notified to the terminal device 1.

The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be indicated by a change of a certain parameter (or parameter value) related to the CRS configuration. For example, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different resource element arrangements. Further, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different antenna ports. Further, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different scramble sequences. In addition, the initial value of the scramble sequence may be different between the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state. Also, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission power. Also, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission subframe intervals. Also, the transmission bandwidth or the number of resource blocks may be different between the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state. That is, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be parameter setting information regarding the CRS configuration. At that time, a certain parameter is individually set for each of the activated state and the deactivated state. Here, an example is given for CRS, but PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, PRS, and the like may be similarly indicated.

The terminal device 1 monitors the CRS configuration indicating the start state and the CRS configuration indicating the stop state. The terminal device 1 monitors two types using a CRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a start state and a CRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a stop state. The terminal device 1 implicitly acquires information on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell based on the monitoring pattern in which the CRS is detected. The monitoring pattern of the CRS configuration indicating the stop state may be defined in advance. The monitoring pattern of the configuration of the CRS indicating the stop state may be notified from the base station apparatus 3 by dedicated RRC signaling.

Information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state may be notified by dedicated RRC signaling. Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the cell may be reported in a list associated with the center frequency (carrier frequency) and the cell ID.

The terminal device 1 can recognize the start / stop state of the target cell by the above notification method. Hereinafter, when the behavior of the terminal device 1 is switched depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell, any of the notification methods described above is applied.

Hereinafter, detection of a cell (base station apparatus 3) will be described.

The cell detection means that the terminal device 1 detects a synchronization signal (such as PSS or SSS) or / and a reference signal (such as CRS or CSI-RS) transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 constituting the cell. . The synchronization signal or / and reference signal used for cell detection includes cell ID information. The terminal device 1 detects the cell based on the cell ID of the cell and the detection standard of the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal.

The cell detection may include the detection of the base station device 3. Detection of the primary cell may include detection of the master base station device. In addition, detection of the primary secondary cell may include detection of the secondary base station apparatus.

An example of synchronization signal or / and reference signal detection criteria will be described.

The terminal device 1 determines detection based on the received power intensity or / and received power quality of the synchronization signal or / and reference signal from the cell. The terminal device 1 compares the received power strength or / and received power quality of the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal with a threshold value, and determines that the cell has been detected when the received strength or / and received quality is high. The received power intensity is, for example, RSRP. The reception quality is, for example, an interference amount, RSRQ, SINR, or the like. The cell detection may be determined by a measurement event described later.

The terminal device 1 determines detection based on the success or failure of decoding of the synchronization signal or / and reference signal information from the cell. For example, the cell (base station apparatus 3 constituting the cell) transmits a synchronization signal or / and a reference signal with a parity code such as CRC. The terminal device 1 performs decoding using the parity code included in the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal, and determines that the cell has been detected when it is determined that the decoding is correctly performed by parity detection.

After the cell is detected in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 selects a cell to be connected / activated and a cell to be disconnected / inactivated.

Alternatively, after detecting a cell in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 reports the detected cell information to the connected base station device 3. The detected cell information includes a cell ID and measurement information.

In the following, CRS for explaining the details of CRS is transmitted through antenna ports 0 to 3. The CRS is arranged in all downlink subframes that are non-MBSFN subframes (non-MBSFN subframe). In other words, the CRS is arranged in all downlink subframes except the MBSFN subframe. In CRS, a resource element and a signal sequence are determined based on a physical cell identifier (PCI).

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the CRS. The CRS signal is generated using a pseudo-random number sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on a physical cell identifier (PCI). The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. R0 to R3 in FIG. 10 are used as resource elements of CRS in the case of normal CP. R0 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 0, R1 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 1, R2 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 2, and R3 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 3. To do. Resource elements of CRS transmitted by one antenna port are arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis. Resource elements of CRS transmitted at antenna port 0 and CRS transmitted at antenna port 1 are arranged 3 subcarriers apart. The CRS is shifted cell-specifically on the frequency based on the cell ID. Resource elements of CRS transmitted at antenna port 0 and CRS transmitted at antenna port 1 are arranged in

OFDM symbols

0 and 4 in the case of normal CP, and are arranged in

OFDM symbols

0 and 3 in the case of extended CP. . Resource elements of CRS transmitted through antenna port 2 and CRS transmitted through antenna port 3 are arranged in OFDM symbol 1. CRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink, and is transmitted over a wide band. Note that the DRS may have the same configuration as the CRS.

Below, the details of DRS (Discovery Reference Signal) will be described. DRS includes downlink time domain synchronization (time synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization (frequency synchronization), cell / transmission point identification, RSRP measurement (RSRP measurement), RSRQ It is transmitted from the base station device 3 for various purposes such as measurement (RSRQ measurement), measurement of the geographical position of the terminal device 1 (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI (CSI measurement). The DRS may be a reference signal used to support the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3. The DRS can be a reference signal used for detecting the base station device 3 in which the terminal device 1 is in the ON state and / or the OFF state.

DRS is composed of multiple signals. As an example, DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CRS. The PSS and SSS included in the DRS may be used for time synchronization, frequency synchronization, cell identification and transmission point identification. The CRS included in the DRS may be used for RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, and CSI measurement. As another example, DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CSI-RS. The PSS and SSS included in the DRS may be used for time synchronization, frequency synchronization, cell identification and transmission point identification. The CSI-RS included in the DRS may be used for transmission point identification, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, and CSI measurement. A DRS composed of a plurality of signals may be referred to as a detection burst. A reference signal for measuring RSRP and / or RSRQ may be referred to as DRS.

The base station apparatus 3 may switch and transmit the first DRS configured by PSS, SSS, and CRS and the second DRS configured by PSS, SSS, and CSI-RS. In that case, the base station apparatus 3 sets the first DRS or the second DRS in the terminal apparatus 1.

DRS is transmitted in the downlink subframe. The DRS is transmitted on the downlink component carrier.

DRS is transmitted when the base station apparatus 3 is in a stopped state (off state, “dormant” mode, “deactivation”). Further, the DRS may be transmitted even when the base station apparatus 3 is in an activated state (on state, active mode, and activation).

DRS can be set independently for each base station device (cell, transmission point). For example, a plurality of small cells transmit DRSs having different settings using different resources.

The base station device 3 sets a DRS list and DRS measurement (detection, monitoring, transmission) timing for the terminal device 1. The DRS-related list is a list of information related to the base station apparatus that transmits the DRS that the terminal apparatus 1 may receive. For example, the list related to DRS is a list of transmission point IDs of transmission points that transmit DRS. The plurality of transmission points transmit DRSs specific to the respective transmission points based on the DRS measurement timing set for the terminal device 1. The terminal device 1 performs DRS measurement based on the DRS-related list set in the base station device 3 and the DRS measurement timing. For example, the terminal device 1 measures DRS determined based on a list related to DRS in a subframe or resource determined based on DRS measurement timing. Further, the terminal device 1 reports the measurement result by the DRS measurement to the base station device 3.

Each transmission point transmits DRS in one subframe. That is, each transmission point transmits PSS related to one DRS, SSS, and CRS and / or CSI-RS in one subframe. The terminal device 1 expects a DRS corresponding to one transmission point to be transmitted in one subframe. One DRS may be transmitted in a plurality of subframes.

DRS transmission or DRS measurement timing is set periodically on the time axis. Also, DRS transmission or DRS measurement timing may be set in successive subframes. In other words, the DRS may be transmitted in bursts. For example, the transmission timing of DRS or the measurement timing of DRS is set in N subframes that are continuous in M subframe periods. A subframe L in which DRS is arranged within a cycle may be set. The values of M, N and / or L are set in the upper layer. Note that the number N of subframes transmitted continuously within a cycle may be defined in advance. If the subframe period M is set to be long, the number of times that the DRS is transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state is reduced, and inter-cell interference can be reduced. Note that different settings may be applied to the values of M, N, and / or L depending on the stop state and the start state. Also, parameters corresponding to the values of M, N and / or L may be notified by higher layer signaling.

Note that the parameter corresponding to M may indicate not only the period but also the subframe offset (or start subframe). That is, the parameter corresponding to M may be an index associated with a period and / or a subframe offset.

Note that the parameter corresponding to N may be managed in a table. The value of the parameter corresponding to N may not directly represent the number of subframes. Further, the parameter corresponding to N may be indicated by including not only the number of subframes but also the start subframe.

Note that the parameter corresponding to L may be managed in a table. The parameter corresponding to L may be associated with the period. The parameter value corresponding to L may not indicate the offset of the subframe as it is.

In a subframe in which DRS may be transmitted or a DRS measurement subframe, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in addition to the DRS measurement. For example, in the parameter corresponding to N, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH. At that time, the terminal device 1 may be required to support a function of monitoring the PDCCH for a small cell in a stopped state.

DRS may be transmitted including transmission point ID information. Here, the transmission point ID information is information for identifying a transmission point (cell) that transmits DRS. For example, the transmission point ID includes physical cell identifier (physical cell ID, physical cell ID, physical layer cell ID), CGI (Cell Global Identity), new cell identifier (small cell ID), discovery ID (Discovery ID), Extended cell ID (extended cell ID, etc.)). Further, the transmission point ID may be an ID different from the physical cell identifier recognized by the PSS and SSS included in the DRS. The transmission point ID may be an ID associated with a physical cell identifier recognized by the PSS and SSS included in the DRS. For example, a certain transmission point ID may be associated with any one of the physical cell identifiers recognized by the PSS and the SSS included in the DRS. A plurality of IDs related to the cell may be transmitted by DRS. For example, in an environment in which a number of cells that are insufficient for the physical cell identifier is arranged, the physical cell identifier can be substantially expanded by transmitting a combination of the physical cell identifier and the new cell identifier by DRS.

DRS is transmitted at antenna ports p, ..., p + n-1. Here, n indicates the total number of antenna ports that transmit DRS. Values other than 0 to 22 and 107 to 110 may be applied to the values of p,. That is, the DRS may be transmitted using an antenna port different from the antenna ports used for other reference signals.

Next, an example of the configuration (or setting) of the DRS will be described.

A plurality of structures and / or configurations may be applied to the DRS. Here, the plurality of configurations may be configurations or settings of a plurality of signals. Further, the plurality of configurations may be signals having a plurality of configurations. In other words, the DRS may be composed of a plurality of signals. For example, the same configuration (or setting) as the PSS may be applied to the DRS. In addition, the same configuration (or setting) as SSS may be applied to DRS. Further, the same configuration (or setting) as the CRS may be applied to the DRS. Further, the same configuration (or setting) as CSI-RS may be applied to DRS. That is, DRS may be based on the configuration (or setting) of the first signal to the nth signal (n is a natural number). In other words, the DRS may be based on the first configuration signal to the nth configuration signal. The signal configuration may include radio resource arrangement (resource setting) and subframe setting.

In DRS, signals (radio resources) of each configuration may be properly used according to the purpose. For example, signals used for time domain and frequency domain synchronization, cell identification, and RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI measurement (RRM measurement) may be performed using signals having different configurations. That is, the terminal apparatus 1 performs time domain and frequency domain synchronization using the first signal, performs cell identification using the second signal, and performs RSRP / RSRQ measurement using the third signal. May be performed. Also, time domain and frequency domain synchronization and cell identification are performed using the first signal and the second signal, and RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI measurement (RRM measurement) is performed using the third signal. Good.

In addition, when the DRS is generated from signals based on a plurality of configurations, a signal having a specific configuration may be transmitted to indicate the start / stop state of the small cell. For example, when the fourth signal (the signal having the fourth configuration) is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may recognize that the small cell is in the activated state and perform processing. That is, the terminal device 1 may recognize that the small cell is in the activated state by detecting the fourth signal (the signal having the fourth configuration).

Furthermore, CSI measurement may be performed using the fifth signal (the signal having the fifth configuration). When the CSI measurement is performed, the terminal device 1 may perform the CSI report in the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe from the subframe in which the CSI measurement is performed. Note that the CSI measurement may be performed using another signal instead of the fifth signal. When CSI measurement is performed in a stopped state, setting information for performing CSI measurement / CSI report in the stopped state is notified from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 using higher layer signaling. .

In addition, the configuration of the DRS transmitted from the small cell (base station apparatus 3 configuring the small cell) may be different depending on whether the small cell is activated or stopped. For example, the signal of the third configuration may be transmitted from the first configuration if it is in the stopped state, and the signal of the fourth configuration may be transmitted from the first configuration if it is in the activated state. Further, in the activated state, the signal of the fourth configuration may be transmitted instead of the signal of the third configuration. Further, when a plurality of signals having the same configuration as SSS are set, a plurality of signals are transmitted in the small cell stop state, but only one signal may be transmitted in the small cell start state. . That is, the configuration of the DRS may be switched according to the state of the small cell.

Also, the DRS may be composed of a plurality of signals in order to transmit an extended physical layer cell identifier (PCI: [Physical] layer [Cell] Identity). Further, a physical layer cell identifier and a transmission point identifier (TP ID: Transmission Point Identity) may be transmitted using a plurality of signals. Here, the plurality of signals may be a plurality of SSSs or signals having the same configuration as the SSS. Here, the plurality of signals may be signals having the same configuration as PSS and SSS. The plurality of signals may be signals having the same configuration as the PSS and the plurality of SSSs. Note that the TPID may be a virtual cell identifier (VCID: “Virtual Cell Identity”). The TPID may be an ID for identifying the transmission point, that is, the base station device 3. The VCID may be an identifier used for a signal sequence. In other words, in the DRS, the cell ID group is identified by the signal of the first configuration, the cell ID is identified by the signal of the first configuration and the signal of the second configuration, the signal of the first configuration, The TPID may be identified by the signal having the second configuration and the signal having the third configuration. Further, the TPID may be extended by the signal of the fourth configuration.

Note that the DRS may be set separately from the PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS. That is, DRS resource setting, subframe setting, antenna port index, number of antenna ports, ID for sequence generation, etc. may be set independently (individually) from PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS. Good.

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a DRS configuration. Here, a sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) used for DRS may be generated by a Zadoff-Chu sequence on the frequency axis. Moreover, DRS may be arrange | positioned continuously on a frequency axis. The DRS may be transmitted using 62 resource blocks using 6 resource blocks. In DRS, 10 subcarriers of the 6 resource blocks may be transmitted with zero power. In other words, the DRS may reserve 10 subcarriers out of the 6 resource blocks and may not transmit a signal. DRS is arranged in the last OFDM symbol of slot number 0 and slot number 10 in the case of FDD (frame configuration type 1), and the third of subframe 1 and subframe 6 in the case of TDD (frame configuration type 2). Maps to an OFDM symbol. The DRS may be transmitted including a part of information specifying the cell ID.

Note that the DRS may be arranged in a resource block (different frequency position) different from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of resource blocks from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of subcarriers than the PSS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted including information different from the cell ID (PCI or VCID).

Another example of the DRS configuration will be described.

Further, FIG. 9 shows another example of the configuration of the DRS. A sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) used for DRS may be interleaved by concatenating two binary sequences of length 31. The DRS sequence may be generated based on the M sequence. The DRS is different from the signal arranged in subframe 0 and the signal arranged in subframe 5. The DRS is arranged in the sixth OFDM symbol of slot number 0 and slot number 10 in the case of FDD, and is arranged in the seventh OFDM symbol of slot number 1 and slot number 11 in the case of TDD. In other words, in the case of FDD, it is arranged in the second OFDM symbol from the end of slot number 0 and slot number 10, and in the case of TDD, it is arranged in the last OFDM symbol of slot number 1 and slot number 11. At that time, the DRS may be transmitted including a part of information specifying the cell ID.

Note that the DRS may be arranged in a resource block (different frequency position) different from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of resource blocks than the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of subcarriers from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted including information different from the cell ID.

Note that the number of subframes in which the DRS is transmitted is not limited. For example, the DRS may be transmitted in

subframes

0, 1, 5, and 6. That is, a plurality of DRSs based on the SSS configuration may be transmitted. In this case, a lot of information can be included in the DRS and transmitted. In this case, since the number of orthogonal sequences increases, there is an effect of suppressing inter-cell interference.

Furthermore, FIG. 10 shows another example of the configuration of the DRS. The DRS signal is generated using a pseudo-random sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on a cell ID (PCI, VCID, scramble identifier (scramble ID), scrambling identifier (scrambling ID), scrambling initialization ID (scrambling ID)). The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. The resource elements of DRS transmitted by one antenna port are arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis. The DRS resource elements transmitted at antenna port p and the DRS resource elements transmitted at antenna port p + 1 are arranged 3 subcarriers apart. The DRS is shifted in a cell-specific manner on the frequency based on the cell ID. The resource elements of the DRS transmitted through the antenna port p and the DRS transmitted through the antenna port p + 1 are arranged in the

OFDM symbols

0 and 4 in the case of the normal CP, and are arranged in the

OFDM symbols

0 and 3 in the case of the extended CP. . The resource elements of the DRS transmitted at antenna port p + 2 and the DRS transmitted at antenna port p + 3 are arranged in OFDM symbol 1. DRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink and is transmitted in a wide band. Note that the DRS transmission bandwidth may be set using higher layer signaling. The DRS transmission bandwidth may be considered to be the same as the measurement bandwidth.

Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a pseudo-random number sequence different from the CRS. Note that DRS may use a calculation method of a sequence different from CRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged on the frequency with a subcarrier period different from that of the CRS. Note that the arrangement relationship of the resource elements of the antenna port p to which DRS is transmitted and the antenna port p + 1 to which DRS is transmitted may be different from the arrangement relationship of the antenna port 0 and the antenna port 1. The DRS may shift the arrangement on the frequency based on information different from the CRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the CRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the CRS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band.

Further, FIG. 10 shows another example of the DRS configuration. A sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) of DRS (D1, D2 in FIG. 10) is generated using a pseudo-random number sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on information from an upper layer. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the cell ID when information from an upper layer is not set. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. The resource element in which the DRS is arranged is determined by a resource setting number (DRS resource configuration index), and may be calculated using the table of FIG. Here, k ′ represents a subcarrier number, l ′ represents an OFDM symbol number, n _s represents a slot number, and n _s mod2 represents a slot number in the subframe. For example, in the case of setting number 0, DRS is arranged in resource elements of slot number 0, subcarrier number 9,

OFDM symbol numbers

5 and 6. DRS is a bandwidth set for the downlink, and is transmitted in a wide band.

Note that a pseudo-random number sequence different from CSI-RS may be used as the DRS sequence. The DRS sequence may be generated based on a sequence calculation method different from CSI-RS. Note that the DRS is not limited to the table of FIG. Note that the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the CSI-RS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band.

Further, FIG. 10 shows another example of the DRS configuration. The resource element in which the DRS is arranged is determined by a resource setting number (DRS resource configuration index), and is calculated using the table of FIG. Here, k ′ represents a subcarrier number, l ′ represents an OFDM symbol number, n _s represents a slot number, and n _s mod2 represents a slot number in the subframe. For example, in the case of setting number 0, DRS is arranged in resource elements of slot number 0, subcarrier number 9,

OFDM symbol numbers

5 and 6. DRS is a bandwidth set for the downlink, and is transmitted in a wide band. The DRS may be transmitted with zero output in the configured resource element. In other words, the base station apparatus 3 may not transmit the DRS in the set resource element. From the viewpoint of the terminal device 1, a resource element in which no DRS is transmitted from the base station device 3 can be used for interference measurement from an adjacent cell (or an adjacent base station device). Further, the DRS may have the same configuration as R6 in FIG.

FIG. 11 shows an example of the DRS configuration. The DRS sequence is generated using a pseudo-random sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the cell ID. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. The DRS transmitted by one antenna port is arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis. The DRS is shifted in a cell-specific manner on the frequency based on the cell ID. In the case of normal CP, the DRS is arranged in the

OFDM symbol

3, 5, 6 in the slot 0th, and in the

OFD symbols

1, 2, 3, 5, 6 in the slot 1 in the slot.

OFDM symbols

4 and 5 are allocated to

OFDM symbols

1, 2, 4, and 5 in the first slot. The DRS resource elements are arranged such that the frequency is shifted by L by L in the l-th OFDM symbol and the l + L-th OFDM symbol. DRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink and is transmitted in a wide band.

Note that a pseudo-random number sequence different from PRS may be used as the DRS sequence. Note that a DRS sequence may use a sequence calculation method different from PRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged on the frequency with a subcarrier period different from that of the PRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the PRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the PRS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band. That is, the DRS transmission bandwidth or measurement bandwidth may be set in the upper layer.

DRS may be configured to include CSI-IM resources. The CSI-IM resource is a resource used for the terminal device 1 to measure interference. For example, the terminal device 1 uses the CSI-IM resource as a resource for measuring interference in CSI measurement or a resource for measuring interference in RSRQ measurement. The CSI-IM resource is set using the same method as the CSI-RS setting method. The CSI-IM resource may be a resource configured as a zero power CSI-RS.

As mentioned above, although the structure of DRS was demonstrated, it is not restricted only to said example, DRS may be comprised combining a plurality of said examples.

Specific examples of preferable combinations are given below. The DRS may be configured by combining a signal configured based on a Zadoff-Chu sequence, a signal configured based on an M sequence, and a signal configured based on a Gold sequence. In addition, a signal configured based on the Gold sequence is configured with a wider band than a signal configured based on the Zadoff-Chu sequence, and a signal configured based on the Zadoff-Chu sequence is transmitted using 6 resource blocks. The signal configured based on the Gold sequence may be transmitted in the entire band of the subframe. That is, the bandwidth in which the DRS is transmitted may be configured by the upper layer. In other words, the DRS is preferably composed of signals having different configurations in different series.

In addition, DRS combines a signal composed of a Zadoff-Chu sequence, a signal composed based on an M sequence, a signal composed based on a Gold sequence, and a signal transmitted with zero output (Zero power). It may be configured. In addition, a resource element may be specified by DRS setting information for a signal configured based on the Gold sequence and a signal transmitted with zero output. In addition, the signal configured based on the Gold sequence is configured with a wider band than the signal configured with the Zadoff-Chu sequence, and the signal configured with the Zadoff-Chu sequence is transmitted using 6 resource blocks. A signal configured based on the sequence may be transmitted in the entire band of the subframe.

The terminal device 1 is notified of the DRS setting by dedicated RRC signaling. The setting of the DRS includes information common to cells transmitting the RS and information for each cell transmitting the DRS. Note that the DRS setting may be notified by being included in the measurement target setting information described later.

Information common to cells transmitting DRS includes information on the center frequency of the band, information on the bandwidth, information on subframes, and the like.

Cell-specific information for transmitting a DRS includes information on the center frequency of the band, information on the bandwidth, information on subframes, information specifying a resource element, information specifying a cell (cell ID, PCI, VCID), etc. Is included.

Since the terminal device 1 can recognize a subframe including a DRS by setting the DRS, the DRS may not be detected in a subframe that does not include the DRS. Thereby, the power consumption of the terminal device 1 can be reduced.

The DRS setting may include the setting of the first configuration signal to the setting of the nth configuration signal. For example, the signal resource settings for each component may be set individually. Further, the subframe setting and transmission power of the signals of each configuration may be common (or a common value). Further, the cell ID, antenna port index, and number of antenna ports may be set only for a signal having a certain configuration. Also, in the DRS setting, a plurality of resource settings, subframe settings, and the like may be set for a signal having a certain configuration.

The DRS setting may include information (parameter) indicating the frequency at which the DRS is transmitted.

In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating an offset (offset value) of a subframe in which the DRS may be transmitted.

In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating a subframe period in which the DRS may be transmitted.

Also, the DRS settings may include an identifier for generating a DRS sequence.

In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating an antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted.

Also, the DRS setting may include information indicating the DRS burst transmission period.

In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating a subframe period in which the DRS is measured at a time during the subframe period.

That is, the DRS setting may include information necessary for transmitting the DRS and / or information necessary for receiving the DRS and / or information necessary for measuring the DRS.

The information included in the above DRS settings may be set for each signal of each configuration. That is, the above information may be set for each signal having a different configuration.

The DRS setting may be notified using higher layer signaling. The DRS setting may be notified using system information. Also, some information on the DRS settings may be notified using L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE).

DRS may be used for a reference signal (listening RS) for synchronization between base station apparatuses (network listening: network listening) using a radio interface at the same frequency.

Hereinafter, synchronization between base station apparatuses using a radio interface using DRS will be described.

By synchronizing the transmission timing between base station apparatuses, it is possible to apply a TDD system, apply inter-cell interference suppression techniques such as eICIC and CoMP, and apply carrier aggregation between base stations with different transmission points. However, when a small cell is placed in an environment with a large backhaul delay and in a building, it is difficult to perform time synchronization by a backhaul or a satellite positioning system (GSNN: Global Navigation Satellite System). Therefore, a wireless interface is used to synchronize downlink transmission timing.

The procedure for synchronization between base station devices using a wireless interface will be described. First, the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for the transmission timing is determined and the transmission timing of the listening RS is designated by the backhaul. At the same time, the base station apparatus 3 that performs synchronization of transmission timing and the reception timing of the listening RS are designated by the backhaul. The base station apparatus 3, MME, or S-GW may determine the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for the transmission timing, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing, and the transmission / reception timing of the listening RS. The base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing transmits the listening RS in the downlink component carrier or the downlink subframe based on the transmission timing notified by the backhaul. The base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing receives the listening RS at the notified reception timing, and synchronizes the transmission timing. Note that the listening RS may be transmitted even when the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing is in a stopped state. The listening RS may be received even when the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in the activated / stopped state.

In TDD, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes transmission timing stops transmission of a downlink signal and receives a radio signal while receiving a listening RS. In other words, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is set in the uplink subframe while receiving the listening RS. Here, the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing recognizes that the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in a stopped state while receiving the listening RS. That is, the terminal device 1 recognizes that PSS / SSS, PBCH, CRS, PCFICH, PHICH, and PDCCH are not transmitted from the base station device 3 that performs transmission timing synchronization. The terminal device 1 is notified of the timing of receiving the listening RS from the base station device 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 is notified of the stop state from the base station device 3. The terminal device 1 does not measure the base station device 3 at the timing of receiving the listening RS. Note that the terminal apparatus 1 connected to the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing may be recognized as an uplink subframe while the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing receives the listening RS.

In FDD, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing stops transmission of the downlink signal while receiving the listening RS, and performs reception processing using the downlink component carrier. Here, the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing recognizes that the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in a stopped state while receiving the listening RS. That is, the terminal device 1 recognizes that PSS / SSS, PBCH, CRS, PCFICH, PHICH, and PDCCH are not transmitted from the base station device 3 that performs transmission timing synchronization. The terminal device 1 is notified of the timing of receiving the listening RS from the base station device 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 is notified of the stop state from the base station device 3. The terminal device 1 does not measure the base station device 3 at the timing of receiving the listening RS.

In addition, the terminal device 1 may detect a cell using the listening RS transmitted from the base station device 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing.

Next, details of physical layer measurement will be described. The terminal device 1 measures the physical layer reported to the upper layer. Physical layer measurements include RSRP (Reference Signal-Received Power), RSSI (Received Signal-Strength Indicator), and RSRQ (Reference Signal-Received Quality).

Next, details of RSRP will be described. RSRP is defined as the received power of the reference signal. RSRQ is defined as the reception quality of the reference signal.

An example of RSRP will be described.

RSRP is defined as a value obtained by linearly averaging the powers of resource elements to which CRS included in the considered measurement frequency bandwidth is transmitted. In determining RSRP, a resource element to which CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped is used. If the terminal device can detect the CRS of antenna port 1, the resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped (the radio resource mapped to the resource element assigned to antenna port 0) for RSRP determination In addition, a resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 1 is mapped (a radio resource mapped to the resource element assigned to antenna port 1) can also be used. Hereinafter, the RSRP calculated using the resource element to which the CRS of the antenna port 0 is mapped is referred to as a CRS base RSRP or a first RSRP.

The terminal device 1 measures the RSRP of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle (RRC_IDLE) state. Here, the intra-frequency cell in the RRC idle state is a cell in the same frequency band as the cell from which the terminal apparatus broadcasts system information. Here, the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle state is a cell in a frequency band different from the cell in which the terminal device 1 receives the system information by broadcasting. The terminal device 1 measures RSRP of an intra-frequency cell and / or an inter-frequency cell in an RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state. Here, the intra-frequency cell in the RRC connection state is a cell in the same frequency band as the cell from which the terminal device 1 has received system information by RRC signaling or broadcast. Here, the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection state is a cell in a frequency band different from the cell in which the terminal device 1 receives the system information by RRC signaling or broadcast.

An example of RSRP will be described.

RSRP is defined as a value obtained by linearly averaging the power of the resource elements to which the DRS included in the considered measurement frequency bandwidth is transmitted. In determining RSRP, a resource element to which DRS is mapped is used. The resource element and antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted are notified in the upper layer.

The terminal device 1 measures the RSRP of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state.

Details of RSSI will be described. RSSI is defined by the total received power observed using the receiving antenna.

An example of RSSI will be described.

RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that are assumed to include the reference signal for antenna port 0. In other words, the RSSI is configured with a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.

An example of RSSI will be described.

RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing all OFDM symbols. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.

An example of RSSI will be described.

RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing OFDM symbols not including DRS. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like. The resource element and / or antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted is notified in the upper layer.

An example of RSSI will be described.

RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS). In other words, the RSSI is configured by a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS). RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.

An example of RSSI will be described.

RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS), and the RSRP value. In other words, RSSI is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) and the value of RSRP. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.

Hereinafter, details of RSRQ will be described. RSRQ is defined by the ratio of RSRP and RSSI, and is used for the same purpose as the signal-to-interference noise ratio (SINR) of the measurement target cell, which is an indicator of communication quality. Although the combination of RSRP and RSSI in RSRQ is not limited to the following, this embodiment describes a preferable combination of RSRP and RSSI in RSRQ.

An example of RSRQ will be described.

RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N × RSRP / RSSI. Here, N is the number of resource blocks corresponding to the measurement bandwidth of RSSI, and the numerator and denominator of RSRQ are configured by the same set of resource blocks. Here, RSRP is the first RSRP. Hereinafter, the RSRQ calculated using the RSRQ calculated using the first RSRP is referred to as a CRS-based RSRQ or a first RSRQ.

RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the reference signal for antenna port 0. In other words, the RSSI is configured by a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0 (the radio resource mapped to the antenna port 0). RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like. When a predetermined subframe for performing RSRQ measurement is designated from higher layer signaling, RSSI is measured from all OFDM symbols in the designated subframe.

The terminal device 1 measures the RSRQ of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle state. The terminal device 1 measures RSRQ of an intra-frequency cell and / or an inter-frequency cell in an RRC connection state.

An example of RSRQ will be described.

RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N × RSRP / RSSI. Here, N is the number of resource blocks in the RSSI measurement bandwidth, and the RSRQ numerator and denominator must be composed of the same set of resource blocks. Here, RSRP is the second RSRP. Hereinafter, the RSRQ calculated using the RSRQ calculated using the second RSRP is referred to as a second RSRQ.

RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that are assumed to include the reference signal for antenna port 0. In other words, the RSSI is configured with a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like. When a predetermined subframe for performing RSRQ measurement is designated from higher layer signaling, RSSI is measured from all OFDM symbols in the designated subframe.

An example of RSRQ will be described.

RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N × RSRP / RSSI. Here, N is the number of resource blocks corresponding to the measurement bandwidth of RSSI, and the numerator and denominator of RSRQ are configured by the same set of resource blocks. Here, RSRP is measured based on DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS).

Also, the RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained based on RSRP and a linear average value of total received power obtained by OFDM symbols not including DRS within the measurement bandwidth.

Also, RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from a linear average value of total received power obtained for all OFDM symbols of the measurement bandwidth.

Also, RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from a linear average value of total received power obtained by OFDM symbols not including DRS within the measurement bandwidth.

Also, RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from RSSI measurement for CRS constituting DRS.

The measurement bandwidth may be set at 5 MHz or more when the DRS has the same configuration as the CSI-RS.

The measurement bandwidth may be set at 6 RBs and / or 15 RBs when the DRS has the same configuration as the CSI-RS.

DRS measurement bandwidth may be set using higher layer signaling.

The terminal device 1 measures the RSRQ of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection state.

The first measurement procedure will be described. The first measurement is a measurement of the first RSRP or the first RSRQ. The first measurement may be measurement of the first signal (the signal having the first configuration) (RRM measurement, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, RSSI measurement).

The terminal device 1 recognizes the resource element in which the CRS transmitted by the antenna port 0 is arranged from the physical cell identifier (PCI). And 1st RSRP is measured from the resource element by which CRS transmitted by the antenna port 0 is arrange | positioned. Note that the number of subframes used for measurement is not limited, and measurement may be performed across a plurality of subframes, and an average value may be reported. Next, an OFDM symbol including antenna port 0 is recognized, and RSSI is measured. Then, the first RSRQ is calculated from the first RSRP and RSSI. Note that the first RSRP and RSSI measurement subframes may be different.

The results (first RSRP and first RSRQ) obtained based on the first measurement procedure are referred to as first measurement results.

The second measurement procedure (second measurement procedure) will be described. The second measurement is a measurement of the second RSRP or the second RSRQ.

The terminal device 1 recognizes the resource element in which the DRS is arranged from the DRS setting information. And 2nd RSRP is measured from the resource element by which DRS is arrange | positioned. Note that the number of subframes used for the measurement is not limited, and a plurality of subframes may be measured and the average value thereof may be reported. Next, RSSI is measured. Then, the second RSRQ is calculated from the second RSRP and RSSI.

In addition, the results (second RSRP, second RSRQ, second RSSI, second RRM) obtained based on the second measurement procedure are referred to as second measurement results. Note that the second measurement may be measurement of a second signal (signal of the second configuration) (RRM measurement, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, RSSI measurement).

Next, a mechanism for reporting the measured value measured by the terminal device 1 to the upper layer will be described.

Explain the measurement model. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a measurement model.

The measurement unit 1301 may include a first layer filtering unit 13011, a third layer filtering unit 13012, and a report criterion evaluation unit 13013. Note that the measurement unit 1301 may be configured to include some functions of the reception unit 105 and the upper layer processing unit 101. Specifically, the first layer filtering unit 13011 may be included in the receiving unit 105, and the third layer filtering unit 13012 and the report criterion evaluation 13013 may be included in the upper layer processing unit 101.

The measured value (sample) input from the physical layer is filtered by the first layer filtering unit 13011. For example, an average of a plurality of input values, a weighted average, an average following channel characteristics, and the like may be applied to the first layer filtering unit 13011, and other filter methods may be applied. The measurement value reported from the first layer is input to the third layer after the first layer filtering unit 13011. The measurement value input to the third layer filtering unit 13012 is filtered. The configuration of layer 3 filtering is provided from RRC signaling. The interval that is filtered and reported by the third layer filtering unit 13012 is the same as the input measurement interval. The report criterion evaluation unit 13013 checks whether it is actually necessary to report the measurement value. Evaluation is based on one or more measurement flows. For example, comparison between different measured values. The terminal device 1 evaluates the report criteria at least every time a new measurement result is reported. The setting of report criteria is provided by RRC signaling. After it is determined that the report of the measurement value is necessary in the evaluation of the report criteria, the terminal device 1 sends measurement report information (measurement report message) via the wireless interface.

Next, measurement will be described. The base station device 3 transmits a measurement configuration (Measurement configuration) message to the terminal device 1 using an RRC connection reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message of RRC signaling (radio resource control signal). The terminal device 1 sets the system information included in the measurement configuration (Measurement configuration) message, and serves the serving cell (serving cell) and neighboring cells (listed cell and / or detection cell) according to the notified system information. (including detected cells), measurement, event evaluation, and measurement reports. The list cell is a cell (cell notified from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 as an adjacent cell list) listed in the measurement object (Measurement object), and the detected cell depends on the measurement object (Measurement object). A cell that is detected by the terminal device 1 at the instructed frequency but is not listed in the measurement object (Measurement object) (a cell detected by the terminal device 1 itself that is not notified as an adjacent cell list).

There are three types of measurements (intra-frequency measurements), inter-frequency measurements (inter-RAT measurements), and inter-RAT measurements (inter-RAT measurements). Intra-frequency measurements are measurements at the serving cell's downlink frequency (downlink frequency). Inter-frequency measurement is a measurement at a frequency different from the downlink frequency of the serving cell. Inter-RAT measurement (inter-RAT measurements) is a measurement using a radio technology (eg, UTRA, GERAN, CDMA2000, etc.) different from the radio technology (eg, EUTRA) of the serving cell.

Measurement setting (Measurement configuration) message includes measurement identifier (measId), measurement object (Measurement objects), reporting setting (Reporting configurations) setting addition and / or modification and / or deletion, physical quantity setting (quantityConfig), measurement gap Settings (measGapConfig), serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure), and the like are included.

The physical quantity setting (quantityConfig) specifies the third layer filtering coefficient (L3 filtering coefficient) when the measurement object (Measurement objects) is EUTRA. The third layer filtering coefficient (L3 filtering coefficient) defines the ratio (ratio) between the latest measurement result and the past filtering measurement result. The filtering result is used for event evaluation in the terminal device 1.

The measurement gap setting (measGapConfig) is used for setting the measurement gap pattern (measurement gap pattern) and controlling the activation / deactivation of the measurement gap (measurement gap). In the measurement gap setting (measGapConfig), a gap pattern (gap pattern), a start system frame number (startSFN), and a start subframe number (startSubframeNumber) are notified as information when the measurement gap is activated. The gap pattern (gap pattern) defines which pattern is used as the measurement gap (measurement gap). The start system frame number (startSFN) defines a system frame number (SFN: System Frame Number) for starting a measurement gap (measurement gap). The start subframe number (startSubframeNumber) defines the subframe number at which the measurement gap (measurement gap) starts.

The measurement gap is a period (time, subframe) that the terminal device 1 may use to perform measurement when uplink / downlink transmission is not scheduled.

When the measurement gap is set for the terminal device 1 that supports the measurement of DRS (or the DRS setting is set), in the subframe defined based on the measurement gap setting (that is, on the measurement gap) DRS may be measured.

When the measurement gap is set for the terminal device 1 that supports the measurement of DRS (or the DRS setting is set), the DRS transmission subframe based on the subframe setting included in the DRS setting is measured. If it overlaps with the subframe defined based on the gap setting, the DRS may be measured on the measurement gap. If the DRS transmission subframe is on the measurement gap, the terminal device 1 may measure the DRS on the measurement gap.

When the measurement gap is set for the terminal device 1 that supports DRS measurement (or the DRS setting is set), the DCI format or MAC CE indicates the cell in which the stop state is indicated. Only DRS may be measured over the measurement gap. That is, the terminal device 1 does not have to perform DRS measurement on the measurement gap for the cell in which the activation state is indicated. The base station apparatus 3 may not transmit the DRS in the activated cell.

The measurement gap may be set for each DRS or for each cell in which the start / stop state is indicated.

The serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure) represents a threshold related to the quality of the serving cell (serving cell), and is used to control whether or not the terminal device 1 needs to perform measurement. The serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure) is set as a value for RSRP.

Here, the measurement identifier (measId) is used to link the measurement object (Measurement objects) and the reporting configuration (Reporting configurations). Specifically, the measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the report setting identifier (reportConfigId) ). One measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and one report setting identifier (reportConfigId) are associated with the measurement identifier (measId). The measurement setting (Measurement configuration) message can be added / modified / deleted with respect to the relationship between the measurement identifier (measId), the measurement object (Measurement objects), and the reporting setting (Reporting configurations).

“MeasObjectToRemoveList” is a command for deleting the measurement object (Measurement objects) corresponding to the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId). At this time, all measurement identifiers (measId) associated with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) are deleted. This command can specify a plurality of measurement object identifiers (measObjectId) at the same time.

measObjectToAddModifyList is a command that modifies the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) to the specified measurement object (Measurement objects) or adds the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the specified measurement object (Measurement objects) It is. This command can specify a plurality of measurement object identifiers (measObjectId) at the same time.

“ReportConfigToRemoveList” is a command for deleting a specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) and a report configuration (Reporting configuration) corresponding to the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId). At this time, all measurement identifiers (measId) associated with the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) are deleted. This command can specify a plurality of report configuration identifiers (reportConfigId) at the same time.

“MeasIdToRemoveList” is a command for deleting a specified measurement identifier (measId). At this time, the measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the report setting identifier (reportConfigId) associated with the designated measurement identifier (measId) are maintained without being deleted. This command can specify a plurality of measurement identifiers (measId) at the same time.

measIdToAddModifyList is modified to associate the specified measurement identifier (measId) with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) and the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId), or specified with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) This is a command for associating the designated report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) with the designated measurement identifier (measId) and adding the designated measurement identifier (measId). This command can specify a plurality of measurement identifiers (measId) at the same time.

Measurement objects are specified for each radio access technology (RAT: Radio Access Technology) and frequency. Moreover, the reporting configuration (Reporting configuration) has a rule for EUTRA and a rule for RATs other than EUTRA.

Measurement objects (Measurement objects) include a measurement object EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) associated with a measurement object identifier (measObjectId).

The measurement object identifier (measObjectId) is an identifier used for identifying the setting of the measurement object (Measurement objects). As described above, the setting of measurement objects (Measurement objects) is specified for each radio access technology (RAT) and frequency. Measurement objects (Measurement objects) are separately specified for EUTRA, UTRA, GERAN, and CDMA2000. Measurement object EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA), which is a measurement object for EUTRA, defines information to be applied to neighboring cells of EUTRA. In addition, the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) having different frequencies is treated as a different measurement target (Measurement objects), and a measurement target identifier (measObjectId) is assigned separately.

An example of information to be measured will be described.

EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo), measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth), antenna port 1 presence information (presenceAntennaPort1), offset frequency (offsetFreq), neighbor cell list (neighbor cell list) Information, information about black list (black list) is included.

Next, information included in the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) will be described. EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo) specifies a carrier frequency to be measured. The measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth) indicates a measurement bandwidth common to all adjacent cells operating at the carrier frequency to be measured. The antenna port 1 presence information (presenceAntennaPort1) indicates whether the antenna port 1 is used in the measurement target cell. The offset frequency (offsetFreq) indicates a measurement offset value applied at the frequency to be measured.

An example of information to be measured will be described.

The base station apparatus 3 performs a setting different from the first measurement in order to cause the terminal apparatus 1 to perform the second measurement. For example, the signal to be measured (or the signal configuration and the signal setting) may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. The cell ID set in the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. Further, the antenna port of the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. Further, the measurement cycle (or measurement subframe pattern) of the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. That is, the first measurement and the second measurement may be set individually.

The measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) includes EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo), measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth), DRS setting information, offset frequency (offsetFreq), information on neighbor cell list (neighbor cell list), black list ( information about black） list).

Next, information included in the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) will be described. EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo) specifies a carrier frequency to be measured. The measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth) indicates a measurement bandwidth common to all adjacent cells operating at the carrier frequency to be measured. The DRS setting information is used to notify the terminal device 1 of common setting information in a frequency band necessary for detecting the DRS setting. For example, the DRS setting information is a subframe number or subframe transmitted in the measurement target cell. Indicates the period. The offset frequency (offsetFreq) indicates a measurement offset value applied at the frequency to be measured.

An example of information related to the neighboring cell list and the black list will be described.

Information related to the neighbor cell list (neighbor cell list) includes information related to event evaluation and neighbor cells that are the targets of measurement reports. Information on the neighbor cell list (neighbor cell list) includes a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID), a cell-specific offset (cellIndividualOffset, indicating a measurement offset value applied to the neighbor cell), and the like. In the case of EUTRA, this information is added, corrected, or deleted from the neighbor cell list (neighbor cell list) that the terminal device 1 has already acquired from the broadcast information (system information to be broadcast). It is used as information.

Also, the information on the black list includes information on neighboring cells that are not subject to event evaluation and measurement reports. The information related to the black list includes a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID). In the case of EUTRA, this information is used as information for the terminal device 1 to add, modify, or delete the black cell list (black listed cell list) already acquired from the broadcast information.

When performing the second measurement, it is assumed that the physical cell identifier (PCI) is used in a case that is insufficient. Therefore, a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the physical cell identifier is extended are required.

The information related to the new neighbor cell list (neighbor small cell list) may include information related to event evaluation and neighbor cells for measurement reports. Information on the new neighboring cell list may include a cell ID, a cell-specific offset (cellIndividualOffset, a measurement offset value applied to the neighboring cell), cell-specific DRS setting information, and the like. Here, the cell-specific DRS setting information is DRS information set in a cell-specific manner, for example, information indicating a DRS resource element to be used. In the case of EUTRA, this information is used as information for the terminal device 1 to add, modify or delete the new neighboring cell list that has already been acquired from the broadcast information (broadcast system information). Is done.

Further, the information on the new black list may include information on neighboring cells that are not subject to event evaluation or measurement reports. Moreover, cell ID etc. may be contained as information regarding a new black list. In the case of EUTRA, this information is added, corrected, or deleted with respect to a new black cell list (black listed small cell list) that the terminal device 1 has already acquired from the broadcast information. It is used as information for

Here, the cell ID is, for example, a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID, physical layer cell ID), CGI (Cell Global Identity / Identifier), ECGI (E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier / Identity), discovery ID (Discovery ID). A virtual cell identifier (virtual cell ID), a transmission point ID, and the like, which are configured based on cell (transmission point) ID information transmitted by DRS. Further, instead of the cell ID, a parameter related to a sequence generator (scrambling sequence generator, pseudorandom sequence generator) may be used.

In addition, when the cell ID (or a parameter related to the pseudo random number sequence generator (for example, scrambling ID)) is included in the DRS setting, the neighboring cell list may indicate a DRS list. That is, the terminal device 1 may measure the DRS of the cell ID set in the neighboring cell list.

When the cell ID is included in the DRS setting, the black list may indicate the DRS black list. That is, the terminal device 1 does not need to measure the DRS of the cell ID set in the black list.

Next, the details of the report settings will be explained.

The reporting configuration (Reporting configuration) includes a reporting configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA) associated with a reporting configuration identifier (reportConfigId).

The report setting identifier (reportConfigId) is an identifier used to identify a reporting configuration related to measurement (Reporting configuration). As described above, the reporting configuration relating to measurement includes the regulations for EUTRA and the regulations for RATs other than EUTRA (UTRA, GERAN, CDMA2000). Reporting configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA), which is a reporting configuration for EUTRA, defines the triggering criteria (triggering criteria) of events used for reporting of measurements in EUTRA.

The report configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA) includes event identifier (eventId), trigger amount (triggerQuantity), hysteresis (hysteresis), trigger time (timeToTrigger), report amount (reportQuantity), maximum number of report cells (maxReportCells), and report interval. (ReportInterval) and the number of reports (reportAmount) are included.

The event identifier (eventId) is used to select a condition related to event trigger reporting (event triggered reporting). Here, event trigger reporting (event triggered reporting) is a method for reporting measurement when an event trigger condition is satisfied. In addition to this, there is also an event trigger periodic report (event triggered periodic reporting) in which a measurement is reported a certain number of times at regular intervals when an event trigger condition is satisfied.

When the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied, the terminal device 1 performs a measurement report (measurement report) to the base station device 3. The trigger amount (triggerQuantity) is an amount used for evaluating the event trigger condition. That is, RSRP or RSRQ is designated. That is, the terminal device 1 uses the amount specified by this trigger amount (triggerQuantity) to measure the downlink reference signal, and whether or not the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied. Determine.

Hysteresis is a parameter used in event trigger conditions. The trigger time (timeToTrigger) indicates a period in which the event trigger condition should be satisfied. The report amount (reportQuantity) indicates the amount reported in the measurement report (measurementmeasurereport). Here, the amount specified by the trigger amount (triggerQuantity), or RSRP and RSRQ are specified.

The maximum number of report cells (maxReportCells) indicates the maximum number of cells to be included in the measurement report. The reporting interval (reportInterval) is used for periodic reporting (periodical reporting) or event trigger periodic reporting (eventtriggered periodic reporting), and is periodically reported for each interval indicated by the reporting interval (reportInterval). The number of reports (reportAmount) defines the number of times that periodic reporting is performed as necessary.

Note that threshold parameters and offset parameters used in event trigger conditions described later are notified to the terminal device 1 together with the event identifier (eventId) in the report setting.

Note that the base station apparatus 3 may or may not notify the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure). When the base station apparatus 3 notifies the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure), the terminal apparatus 1 performs the measurement of the neighboring cell when the RSRP of the serving cell (serving cell) is lower than the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure). , Perform event evaluation (whether or not event trigger condition is satisfied, also referred to as reporting condition evaluation). On the other hand, when the base station apparatus 3 does not notify the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure), the terminal apparatus 1 performs measurement of the adjacent cell and event evaluation regardless of the RSRP of the serving cell (serving cell).

Next, details of events and event trigger conditions will be described.

The terminal device 1 that satisfies the event trigger condition transmits a measurement report to the base station device 3. The measurement report (Measurement report) includes a measurement result (Measurement result).

A plurality of event trigger conditions for performing measurement reports (measurement reports) are defined, and there are a subscription condition and a withdrawal condition, respectively. That is, the terminal device 1 that satisfies the subscription condition for the event specified by the base station device 3 transmits a measurement report (measurement report) to the base station device 3. On the other hand, the terminal device 1 that has transmitted the measurement report (measurement report) while satisfying the event subscription condition stops transmitting the measurement report (measurement report) when the event leaving condition is satisfied.

As an example of the event and event trigger condition described below, either the first measurement result or the second measurement result is used.

Below, an example of a method for specifying the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition will be described.

The report settings specify the type of measurement results used to evaluate event trigger conditions. Depending on the parameter, the event trigger condition is evaluated using either the first measurement result or the second measurement result.

As a specific example, whether the first measurement result or the second measurement result is specified by a trigger physical quantity (triggerQuantity). The trigger physical quantity may be defined by {first RSRP, first RSRQ, second RSRP, second RSRQ} and four selection fields. The terminal device 1 measures the downlink reference signal using the physical quantity specified by the trigger physical quantity (triggerQuantity), and determines whether the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied. To do.

As a specific example, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is defined by a new parameter (triggerMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result used for evaluating the event trigger condition in addition to the trigger physical quantity. May be. The new parameter is set with information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result or information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result. For example, when information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result is set in the new parameter, the terminal device 1 performs the second measurement and uses the second measurement result. Evaluate event trigger conditions. The parameter may be shared with a parameter (reportMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result to be reported.

In the event trigger conditions that use two or more measurement results in one conditional expression, such as comparison between the measurement result of the serving cell and the measurement result of the neighboring cell, the measurement used to evaluate the event trigger condition for each. You may specify the type of result. For example, a new parameter (triggerMeasTypeServ) for the measurement result of the serving cell and a new parameter (triggerMeasTypeNeigh) for the measurement result of the neighboring cell may be defined.

報告 Depending on the report settings, the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the condition that specifies the measurement.

As a specific example, the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell. For example, if the target cell is in the activated state, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result, and if the target cell is in the stopped state, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result. Is done.

As a specific example, the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the detection of the reference signal. For example, when CRS is detected and DRS is not detected, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result, and when CRS is not detected and DRS is detected, the second measurement result is Event trigger conditions may be evaluated. Further, when both CRS and DRS are detected, the event trigger condition may be evaluated using the measurement result with the higher received power. When both CRS and DRS are detected, the event trigger condition may be evaluated using a measurement result obtained by averaging both received powers. Further, when both CRS and DRS are not detected, the event trigger condition may not be evaluated.

Next, the details of the measurement results will be described.

This measurement result (Measurement result) includes a measurement identifier (measId), a serving cell measurement result (measResultServing), and an EUTRA measurement result list (measResultListEUTRA). Here, the EUTRA measurement result list (measResultListEUTRA) includes a physical cell identifier (physicalCellIdentity) and an EUTRA cell measurement result (measResultEUTRA). Here, the measurement identifier (measId) is an identifier used for the link between the measurement target identifier (measObjectId) and the report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) as described above. The physical cell identifier (physicalCellIdentity) is used to identify the cell. The EUTRA cell measurement result (measResultEUTRA) is a measurement result for the EUTRA cell. The measurement result of the adjacent cell is included only when the related event occurs.

An example of the measurement result will be described.

The terminal device 1 may report the measurement result including the RSRP and RSRQ results for the target cell. The RSRP and RSRQ reported at one time may be either one of the first measurement result or the second measurement result. Note that the first measurement result may be a measurement result obtained from the first measurement. Further, the second measurement result may be a measurement result obtained from the second measurement. In other words, the first measurement result is a measurement result obtained based on the setting information related to the first measurement, and the second measurement result is a measurement result obtained based on the setting information related to the second measurement. It is.

As a specific example, the measurement result is reported based on a parameter that determines whether the measurement result is the first measurement result or the second measurement result. The criterion for determining whether the measurement result is the first measurement result or the second measurement result is, for example, a new parameter (reportMeasType). The new parameter may be set with information indicating that the first measurement result is reported or information indicating that the second measurement result is reported. For example, when information indicating that the second measurement result is reported is set in the new parameter, the terminal device 1 recognizes the new parameter, performs the second measurement, and measures the second measurement result. Transmission is carried out in the report message, and the first measurement result is not transmitted. The new parameter may be set with information indicating that the first measurement result and the second measurement result are reported.

The new parameter may be shared with a parameter (triggerMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result used for evaluating the event trigger condition. The parameter may be shared with an upper layer parameter that specifies a measurement method.

The parameter (reportQuantity) indicating the report physical quantity may be set for each type to be measured as a parameter (reportQuantityRSRP) for RSRP and a parameter (reportQuantityRSRQ) for RSRQ. For example, when reportQuantityRSRP is set as the first RSRP and reportQuantityRSRQ is set as the second RSRQ, the terminal device 1 transmits the first RSRP and the second RSRQ, and the second RSRP and the first RSRQ. Will not send.

To give a specific example, it may be reported depending on the conditions for specifying the measurement.

For example, the type of the measurement result to be reported may be determined depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell.

For example, the type of measurement result to be reported is determined depending on the detection of the reference signal. For example, when CRS is detected and DRS is not detected, the first measurement result is reported, and when CRS is not detected and DRS is detected, the second measurement result is reported. If both CRS and DRS are detected, the measurement result with the higher received power is reported. If both CRS and DRS are not detected, they are not reported or the lowest value is reported.

Note that the terminal apparatus 1 determines which type of measurement in the measurement result in order to make the base station apparatus 3 recognize whether the reported measurement result is the result calculated by the first measurement or the result calculated by the second measurement. A parameter may be added that specifies whether is set.

In the above, an example of event, event trigger condition, and measurement result reporting has been described. With these combinations, the terminal device 1 reports the first measurement result and / or the second measurement result to the base station device 3. In this embodiment, a combination of an event, an event trigger condition, and a measurement result report is not limited, but an example of a preferable combination will be described below.

An example of a combination of event, event trigger condition, and measurement result report is explained.

When performing the first measurement, a measurement object (measObject) including a neighbor cell list or a black list in which a physical cell identifier is set is set, and an event triggered by the first measurement and an event trigger condition Is set, and the measurement report message including the first measurement results (measResults) is transmitted by associating them with the ID. Furthermore, when the second measurement is performed, a measurement object (measObject) including a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the extended cell ID is set is set, and triggered by the second measurement. A report setting (reportConfig) in which events and event trigger conditions are set is set, and a measurement report message including the second measurement results (measResults) is transmitted by associating them with an ID.

That is, the measurement object, report setting, and measurement result for the first measurement and the measurement object, report setting, and measurement result for the second measurement are set in the terminal device 1. That is, the report setting for the first measurement result and the report setting for the second measurement result are set independently.

An example of a combination of event, event trigger condition, and measurement result report will be described.

When performing the first measurement, a measurement object (measObject) including a neighbor cell list or a black list in which a physical cell identifier is set is set, and an event triggered by the first measurement and an event trigger condition The report setting (reportConfig) is set, and these are linked by the measurement result (measResults) and the ID. In the case of performing the second measurement, a measurement object (measObject) including a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the extended cell ID is set is set, and an event triggered by the second measurement is set. In addition, a report configuration (reportConfig) in which event trigger conditions are set is set, and these are associated with the measurement results (measResults) and ID. When an event triggered by the first measurement occurs, the first measurement result is substituted into the measurement result and transmitted by the measurement report message. When an event triggered by the second measurement occurs, the second measurement result is substituted into the measurement result and transmitted by the measurement report message.

That is, the measurement object and report setting for the first measurement and the measurement object and report setting for the second measurement are set, and the field of the measurement result is shared between the first measurement and the second measurement. Depending on the event, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is transmitted.

Thereby, the terminal device 1 can report the first measurement result and the second measurement result to the base station device 3.

The terminal device 1 according to the present embodiment is a terminal device 1 that communicates with the base station device 3, and performs the first measurement based on the first RS (CRS), and based on the second RS (DRS). A receiving unit 105 that performs a second measurement, and an upper layer processing unit 101 that reports the first measurement result and the second measurement result to the base station device 3, and in the first state, The first measurement result is reported to the base station apparatus 3, and in the second state, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is reported to the base station apparatus 3.

As an example, in the second state, the base station apparatus 3 sets an event for reporting the first measurement result and an event for reporting the second measurement result. Further, as an example, in the second state, only the event reporting the second measurement is set by the base station device 3. The event trigger condition for reporting the second measurement result is defined using the second measurement result.

As an example, the first state is a state in which the setting information of the second RS is not notified, and the second state is a state in which the setting information of the second RS is notified from the base station apparatus 3. It is the state that was done. Further, as an example, the first state is a state where the second measurement information is not set, and the second state is the case where the second measurement information is set from the base station apparatus 3. State. As an example, the second state is a state in which the first RS is not transmitted.

The report settings for DRS may be set separately from the report settings for CRS and CSI-RS.

In transmission power and PHR (Power Headroom), the value is determined depending on the path loss. Hereinafter, an example of a method for estimating a path loss (a propagation path attenuation value) will be described.

The downlink path loss estimated value of the serving cell c is calculated by the terminal device 1 by the following formula: PLc = referenceSignalPower-higher layer filtered RSRP. Here, referenceSignalPower is given by the upper layer. ReferenceSignalPower is information based on the transmission power of CRS. Here, higher layer filtered RSRP is the first RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer.

If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG (pTAG) including the primary cell, the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for referenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered for the uplink primary cell. For the uplink secondary cell, the serving cell set by the upper layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking is used as the reference serving cell of referenceSignalPower and higherhighlayer filtered RSRP. If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG (eg, sTAG) that does not include a primary cell, the serving cell c is used as a reference serving cell of referenceSignalPower and higherhighlayer filtered RSRP.

An example of a method for estimating the path loss will be described.

The downlink path loss estimated value of serving cell c is PLcPL = 端末 discoveryReferenceSignalPower-higher layer filtered RSRP2 if set by higher layer, otherwise PLcPL = referenceSignalPower-higher layer filtered RSRP2 Calculated. Here, referenceSignalPower is given by the upper layer. ReferenceSignalPower is information based on the transmission power of CRS. Here, higher layer filtered RSRP is the first RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer. Here, discoveryReferenceSignalPower is a parameter related to DRS transmission power, and is given by the upper layer. Also, higher layer filtered RSRP2 is the second RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer.

Here, the case of being set by the upper layer may be, for example, a case based on the setting of the DRS notified using upper layer signaling. The case where it is set by the upper layer may be a case where it is based on the measurement setting notified using upper layer signaling, for example. The case of being set by the upper layer may be, for example, a case based on the setting of uplink transmission power control notified using upper layer signaling. That is, the case where it is set by the higher layer may include a case where a parameter or information is notified using higher layer signaling and is set in the terminal device 1.

If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG including the primary cell, the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for the discoveryReferenceSignalPower and the higher layer filtered for the uplink primary cell. For the uplink secondary cell, the serving cell set by the upper layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking is used as the reference serving cell of discoveryReferenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered RSRP2. If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG that does not include a primary cell, the serving cell c is used as a reference serving cell for discoveryReferenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered RSRP2.

When the secondary cell is in a stopped state, the terminal device 1 may not perform the following process. The processing includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell Data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.

When the secondary cell is a small cell, the terminal device 1 may perform the following process even if the secondary cell is in a stopped state. The processing includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI report to the secondary cell, (uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in the secondary cell), RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, the terminal device 1 makes a request for SRS transmission to the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If there is (SRS request is transmitted), SRS may be transmitted in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive SRS.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, there is a request for CSI reporting to the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross-carrier scheduling (CSI request is Terminal device 1 may transmit CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell using the PUSCH of the primary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell on the PUSCH of the primary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, a random access response grant (RAR grant) according to the PDCCH order is transmitted from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If so, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive the RACH in the secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, the RA-RNTI is scrambled from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. If the DCI format with CRC can be detected, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive the RACH in the secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, if the setting of the EPDCCH set (or EPDCCH setting) is not set for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell. . That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PDCCH in the stopped small cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, the downlink grant or the uplink grant from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling, When a CSI request, an SRS request, a random access response grant, or the like is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is set only when the EPDCCH set (or EPDCCH setting) is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. May monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PDCCH in the stopped small cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, even if information related to uplink scheduling is transmitted to the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 does not perform uplink transmission based on information related to uplink scheduling. Also good. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 does not expect uplink transmission to be performed in a small cell in a stopped state.

If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell (special secondary cell), the terminal device 1 is secondary if it has a request for SRS transmission to the secondary cell (SRS request is transmitted) by self-scheduling. SRS may be transmitted in the cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive SRS.

If the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, if there is a CSI report request for the secondary cell (a CSI request is transmitted) in the self-scheduling, the terminal apparatus 1 performs CQI / PMI for the secondary cell. / RI / PTI may be transmitted using the PUSCH of the secondary cell.

If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, if a random access response grant (RAR grant) according to the PDCCH order is transmitted by self-scheduling, the terminal device 1 performs RACH transmission in the secondary cell. May be.

If the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, if the DCI format with the CRC in which the RA-RNTI is scrambled can be detected for the secondary cell by self-scheduling, the terminal device 1 Then, RACH transmission may be performed.

When the stopped secondary cell is the primary secondary cell, if the EPDCCH set is not set for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell. That is, if the terminal device 1 has not received the setting of the EPDCCH set for the primary secondary cell, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the secondary cell. Moreover, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit PDCCH with respect to the terminal device 1 by a secondary cell, if the setting of an EPDCCH set is not set with respect to the primary secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, when a downlink grant, an uplink grant, a CSI request, an SRS request, a random access response grant, etc. are transmitted to the secondary cell by self-scheduling, the terminal The apparatus 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is only connected to the secondary cell when the EPDCCH set is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. PDCCH may be monitored.

If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, if information on uplink scheduling (PUSCH grant, CSI request, SRS request) is transmitted to the secondary cell by self-scheduling, the terminal device 1 May perform uplink transmission based on information related to uplink scheduling in the secondary cell. For example, when DCI format 0 is detected for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may perform PUSCH transmission in the secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell (special secondary cell), the terminal device 1 uses the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If there is a request for SRS transmission for (SRS request is transmitted), the SRS may be transmitted in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, there is a request for CSI reporting from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell (CSI request) by cross carrier scheduling. Terminal apparatus 1 may transmit CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell using the PUSCH of the primary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, a random access response grant (RAR grant) according to the PDCCH order is generated from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If it is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. In this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the random access response grant (RAR grant) by the PDCCH order to the secondary cell in the stopped state by cross carrier scheduling.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, RA-RNTI is scrambled from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. If the DCI format with CRC is detected, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

When the stopped secondary cell is the primary secondary cell, if the EPDCCH set is not set for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell.

When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, the downlink grant or the uplink grant is performed from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. When a CSI request, an SRS request, a random access response grant, or the like is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is only connected to the secondary cell when the EPDCCH set is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. PDCCH may be monitored.

When the cross carrier scheduling is invalid for the secondary cell in the stopped state, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell in the stopped state.

When the cross carrier scheduling is invalid for the secondary cell in the stopped state and various settings regarding the EPDCCH are not received, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the secondary cell in the stopped state. May be.

If there is no EPDCCH setting and / or EPDCCH set setting for the stopped secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the stopped secondary cell. Further, the base station apparatus 3 transmits the PDCCH in the stopped secondary cell to the terminal apparatus 1 depending on whether or not the EPDCCH setting and / or the EPDCCH set setting for the stopped secondary cell is set. It may be determined whether or not.

If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, if information on uplink scheduling is transmitted from the primary cell to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling, the terminal device 1 relates to uplink scheduling. Uplink transmission based on information may be performed. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

For a certain serving cell, the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to transmission modes 1 to 9 by higher layer signaling, and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH. For example, the terminal device 1 assumes that the antenna ports 0 to 3 and 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged with respect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread.

For a certain serving cell, the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to the transmission mode 10 by higher layer signaling, and for each EPDCCH-PRB set, the terminal device 1 If the terminal device 1 is set by the higher layer to further decode the PDSCH corresponding to the pseudo shared arrangement (QCL: Quasi Co-Location) type A, The apparatus 1 assumes that antenna ports 0 to 3 and antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged with respect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. On the other hand, if the terminal device 1 is set by the upper layer to decode the PDSCH according to the pseudo-shared arrangement type B, the terminal device 1 is higher in terms of Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. Assume that the antenna ports 15 to 22 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to the layer parameter (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.

QCL type A may assume that the terminal device 1 has a pseudo shared arrangement of the antenna ports 0 to 3 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell with regard to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread.

In the QCL type B, the terminal device 1 has antenna ports 15 to 22 and antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to upper layer parameters (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) regarding Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. You may assume that it is a pseudo-shared arrangement.

That is, the terminal device 1 assumes that the antenna ports 0 to 3 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged when the type A is set based on the higher layer parameter QCL operation. When type B is set, it is assumed that the antenna ports 15 to 22 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to the upper layer parameter (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner. In other words, the terminal device 1 set to monitor the EPDCCH assumes that the CRS and the EPDCCH are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner when the type A is set based on the higher layer parameter QCL operation. When Type B is set, it is assumed that CSI-RS and EPDCCH are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.

For a certain serving cell, the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to the transmission mode 10 by higher layer signaling, and for each EPDCCH-PRB set, the terminal device 1 Parameters set by higher layer parameters (re-MappingQCL-ConfigId, PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-ConfigId) to determine EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement Set (PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-Config) is used. Various parameters (crs-PortsCount, crs-FreqShift, mbsfn-SubframeConfigList, csi-RS-ConfigZPId, pdsch-Start, qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId for determining EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement ) Is included in the parameter set.

In a certain serving cell (secondary cell), when the terminal device 1 is set to receive DRS by higher layer signaling and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH, the DRS and EPDCCH resource elements An upper layer parameter (qcl-DRS-ConfigId) for determining the mapping and the EPDCCH antenna port pseudo shared arrangement may be set.

In a certain serving cell (secondary cell), when the terminal device 1 is set to receive DRS by higher layer signaling, and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH, the terminal device 1 It is assumed that one or more antenna ports corresponding to the upper layer parameter (qcl-DRS-ConfigId) and the antenna ports 107 to 110 are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.

Various parameters (drs-PortsCount, drs-FreqShift, drs-ConfigZPId, qcl-DRS-ConfigNZPId, qcl-DRS-ConfigId, etc.) for determining the EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement for DRS It may be set. That is, the number of DRS antenna ports (drs-PortsCount) may be included in the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS. Further, the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS may include DRS frequency shift (drs-FreqShift). Further, zero power DRS-ID (drs-ConfigZPId) may be included in the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS. Further, the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS may include the ID (qcl-DRS-ConfigNZPId) of the non-zero power DRS arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.

In the pseudo-shared arrangement with the EPDCCH, the target signal may be changed depending on the start / stop state of the serving cell (secondary cell). For example, it is assumed that the terminal apparatus 1 is pseudo-shared with the DRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is assumed to be pseudo-shared with the CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. Good. Further, it is assumed that the terminal device 1 is quasi-shared with CSI-RS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is quasi-shared with CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. May be. Further, it is assumed that the terminal device 1 is pseudo-shared with CSI-RS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is pseudo-shared with CSI-RS, CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. You may assume that That is, the terminal device 1 determines the pseudo shared arrangement (resource element mapping and antenna port) of the EPDCCH based on the set setting information. The base station apparatus 3 may transmit information regarding a plurality of QCL settings when changing the pseudo-shared arrangement of the EPDCCH in the activated state and the deactivated state.

Next, discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) will be described.

The terminal device 1 activates PDCCH monitoring of the terminal device 1 for the C-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, and SPS-RNTI of the terminal device 1 (whether or not to perform PDCCH monitoring). May be set by RRC with DRX function to control. If DRX is not set, the terminal device 1 continues to monitor the PDCCH continuously. In order to perform DRX, a plurality of timers (onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer, etc.) are set in the terminal device 1. Also, by setting the period (longDRX-Cycle, shortDRX-Cycle) and the start offset (drxStartOffset), a subframe for monitoring the PDCCH is set during DRX. Parameters related to short DRX (drxShortCycleTimer, shortDRX-Cycle) may be set as options. A HARQ RTT timer is defined for each DL HARQ process (excluding broadcast processes). Note that a period during which the PDCCH can be monitored during DRX is referred to as an active time.

The active time may be a time when at least one of the timers (onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer, mac-ContentionResolutionTimer) is active. The active time may be a time during which a scheduling request is transmitted on the PUCCH and is pending. The active time may be an uplink grant for pending HARQ transmission, and may be a time when data is in the corresponding HARQ buffer. Further, the active time may be a time during which the PDCCH instructing new transmission related to the C-RNTI of the terminal device 1 is not received after successful reception of a random access response for a preamble that is not selected by the terminal device 1. The active time may be the number of subframes set as DRX active time (drx-Activetime).

If DRX is set, the terminal apparatus 1 will, for each subframe, if the HARQ RTT timer expires in this subframe or if the corresponding HARQ process data has not been successfully decoded, the corresponding HARQ Start a DRX retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer) for the process.

If DRX is set, the terminal device 1 may receive a DRX command MAC control element (MAC CE) for each subframe, and a duration timer (onDurationTimer) and a DRX inactivity timer (drx− InactivityTimer).

The duration timer (onDurationTimer) is used to define continuous PDCCH subframes at the beginning of the DRX cycle.

The DRX inactivity timer (drx-InactivityTimer) is for specifying the number of consecutive PDCCH subframes after the subframe in which the PDCCH instructing the initial uplink / downlink user data transmission to a certain terminal apparatus 1 is transmitted. Used.

The DRX retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer) is used to specify the maximum number of consecutive PDCCH subframes until a downlink transmission is received.

The HARQ RTT timer is used to specify the minimum number (minimum amount) of subframes before downlink HARQ transmission is expected by the terminal device 1.

The MAC contention resolution timer (mac-ContentionResolutionTimer) specifies the number of consecutive subframes in which the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH after the message 3 (PUSCH corresponding to the random access response grant) is transmitted. Used for.

DRX short cycle timer (drxShortCycleTimer) is used to define the number of consecutive subframes in which the terminal device 1 follows the short DRX cycle.

DRX start offset (drxStartOffset) is used to define the subframe in which the DRX cycle starts.

The active time is a time related to the DRX operation, and defines a period (time) during which the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the PDCCH monitoring subframe.

The PDCCH monitoring subframe is basically the same as the PDCCH subframe. However, when the terminal device 1 is capable of eIMTA in a certain serving cell, the PDCCH monitoring subframe is in accordance with the TDD UL-DL setting indicated by the L1 signaling related to eIMTA (for example, the DCI format in which eIMTA-RNTI is scrambled). Thus, it is a subframe including the determined downlink subframe and DwPTS.

When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 expires the DRX inactivity timer for each subframe or receives a DRX command MAC CE in this subframe, and further sets a short DRX cycle. If so, start (restart) the DRX short cycle timer (drxShortCycleTimer) and use the short DRX cycle. Otherwise, the long DRX cycle is used.

When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 uses the long DRX cycle when the DRX short cycle timer expires for each subframe.

When DRX is set, the terminal apparatus 1 has a predetermined formula for each subframe based on a system frame number, a subframe number, a short DRX cycle (and / or a long DRX cycle), and a DRX start offset (drxStartOffset). If the condition is satisfied, the duration timer is started.

When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 is in active time for each subframe, and for the PDCCH subframe, the subframe is for uplink transmission for half-duplex FDD terminal device operation. If it is not necessary or if the subframe is not part of the configured measurement gap, the PDCCH is monitored. Furthermore, if the PDCCH indicates downlink transmission, or if downlink assignment is set for this subframe, the HARQ RTT timer for the corresponding HARQ process is started and Stop the DRX retransmission timer for the HARQ process to perform. If the PDCCH indicates a new transmission (downlink or uplink), the DRX inactivity timer is started (or restarted).

When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 evaluates all DRX active time conditions in the latest subframe n for each subframe (including subframe n-5). ) Trigger type 0 SRS is not transmitted if it is not in the active time considering the scheduling request transmitted up to subframe n-5 and the received grant / assignment / DRX command MAC CE.

When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 sets the duration timer in the latest subframe n, assuming that CQI masking (cqi-Mask) is set up by the upper layer for each subframe. Assume that all DRX active time conditions are being evaluated (including subframe n-5) and that it is not within the active time considering the grant / assignment / DRX command MAC CE received by subframe n-5 , CQI / PMI / RI / PTI is not reported on PUCCH. Otherwise, in the latest subframe n, the terminal apparatus 1 has evaluated all DRX active time conditions and has received the grant / assignment received by subframe n-5 (including subframe n-5). If it is not during the active time considering / DRX command MAC CE, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI (that is, CSI) is not reported in PUCCH.

The terminal apparatus 1 may receive / transmit HARQ feedback and transmit the trigger type 1 SRS if there is a possibility that the terminal apparatus 1 may occur regardless of whether or not the terminal apparatus 1 is monitoring the PDCCH.

The same active time may be applied to all activated serving cells (activated serving cell (s)).

In the case of downlink spatial multiplexing, if the transport block is received while the HARQ RTT timer is running and the previous transmission of the same transport block is received in the subframe at least N subframes before the latest subframe If so, the terminal device 1 may process it and restart the HARQ RTT timer. Here, N corresponds to a value set in the HARQ RTT timer or the HARQ RTT timer.

When DRX is set in the primary cell and the DRS setting for the secondary cell is set, the terminal apparatus 1 is set based on the measurement subframe set based on the DRS setting and the DRX setting. When PDCCH subframes to be overlapped with each other, DRS measurement and PDCCH monitoring may be performed in the stopped secondary cell in the overlapping subframe. The active time of DRX applies to all active serving cells, i.e. all serving cells in the activated state, but not to inactive serving cells, i.e. serving cells in the deactivated state. When the DRS setting is set, the DRX active time may be applied to the serving cell (or secondary cell) even if it is inactive (off state, deactivation, and dormant mode). In this case, the DRS setting may not include the subframe setting. That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS based on the DRX active time.

When DRX is set in all active serving cells, in a small cell in a stopped state in which DRS setting is set, the terminal apparatus 1 may measure DRS in a subframe that becomes an active time by DRX. .

When the DRX inactivity timer or the duration timer expires, the terminal apparatus 1 does not perform DRS measurement even if measurement is possible based on the DRS measurement subframe with respect to the subframe after expiration. Also good. That is, when the DRX inactivity timer or the duration timer expires, the terminal device 1 does not expect the DRS to be transmitted in the subsequent DRS measurement subframe.

In the terminal device 1 in which DRX is configured, when the DRS configuration for the secondary cell in a stopped state (as a small cell) is notified (provided or given) using higher layer signaling, the terminal device 1 In the DRS transmission subframe of the secondary cell that overlaps with the DRX active time, DRS RRM (RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI) measurement may be performed.

DRX configuration (drx-Config) may be individually set in MCG and SCG, primary cell and primary secondary cell, or MeNB and SeNB. DRX in the SCG may indicate a start / stop state of the primary secondary cell. When DRX is set for SCG, DRS and PDCCH may be transmitted in the DRX subframe.

Here, the DRX setting is used, but various parameters set in the DRX setting may be set as a DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) setting.

Next, radio link monitoring will be described. In the radio link monitoring, the downlink radio link quality of the primary cell is monitored by the terminal device 1 in order to indicate whether the upper layer is in-sync or out-of-sync.

In the non-DRX operation, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 has a threshold (Q _in , Q _out ) defined based on a test related to radio link monitoring for each radio frame (number of subframes constituting the radio frame). On the other hand, it evaluates the radio link quality, evaluated over the past (previous) time period.

In the DRX operation, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 has a threshold value (Q _in , Q _out) defined based on a test related to radio link monitoring for each DRX cycle (the number of subframes constituting the DRX cycle). ) For the radio link quality evaluated over the past (previous) time period.

If higher layer signaling indicates a subframe to limit radio link monitoring, the radio link quality is not monitored in subframes other than the subframe indicated by higher layer signaling. That is, when the subframe in which radio link monitoring is performed is restricted by higher layer signaling, terminal apparatus 1 performs radio link monitoring only in the restricted subframe.

When the radio link quality is worse than the threshold value _Qout in the radio frame in which the radio link quality is evaluated, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 indicates that it is out of synchronization with the upper layer. Further, when the radio link quality is better than the threshold value Q _in , it indicates that the physical layer of the terminal device 1 is in synchronization with the upper layer in the radio frame in which the radio link quality is evaluated.

The physical layer of the terminal device 1 that supports dual connectivity may perform radio link monitoring for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. Further, a threshold value related to radio link quality may be defined for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

The physical layer of the terminal device 1 that supports dual connectivity may individually evaluate the radio link quality (out of synchronization, within synchronization) for the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

The physical layer of the terminal device 1 supporting dual connectivity activates a protection timer when the synchronization loss continues for a predetermined number of times when evaluating the radio link quality. When this protection timer expires, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 notifies the upper layer that a loss of synchronization has occurred in the cell (in other words, a physical layer problem has been detected). When the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary cell, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 recognizes that a radio link failure (RLF: “Radio” Link “Failure”) has been detected. At that time, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may notify the base station device 3 that the RLF has been detected in the primary cell. Note that the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may not recognize the RLF when the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary secondary cell. Moreover, when the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary secondary cell, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may perform the same process as that of the primary cell.

Next, semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) will be described. When semi-persistent scheduling is set to be effective by the RRC layer (upper layer signaling, upper layer), the following information is provided to the terminal device 1. The information includes the semi-persistent scheduling C-RNTI, if semi-persistent scheduling is enabled for the uplink, the uplink semi-persistent scheduling interval (semiPersistSchedIntervalUL) and the number of empty transmissions before the implicit release. (ImplicitReleaseAfter), only for TDD, whether two interval settings (twoIntervalsConfig) are valid for the uplink, or if the semi-persistent scheduling is valid for the downlink, the downlink semi-persistent scheduling interval (SemiPersistSchedIntervalDL) and the number of HARQ processes (numberOfConfSPS-Processes) set for semi-persistent scheduling.

When the semi-persistent scheduling for uplink or downlink is set to invalid by the RRC layer (upper layer signaling, upper layer), the corresponding set grant or set assignment is ignored.

Semi-persistent scheduling is supported only for the primary cell.

Semi-persistent scheduling is not supported for RN communication in combination E-UTRAN with RN subframe configuration.

After the semi-persistent downlink assignment is set, the terminal device 1 considers that the Nth assignment occurs in the system frame number and the subframe that satisfy a certain condition and is continuous. Here, the certain condition is determined based on the system frame number (SFN _{start_time} ) and the subframe (subframe _{start_time} ) when the downlink assignment set in the terminal device 1 is initialized (or reinitialized). May be.

After the semi-persistent uplink grant is set, the terminal apparatus 1 sets a subframe offset (Subframe_Offset) based on a certain table if the two interval settings are set to be valid in the upper layer. Otherwise, the subframe offset is set to zero.

After the semi-persistent uplink grant is set, the terminal device 1 considers that the Nth grant occurs in the system frame number and the subframe that satisfy a certain condition and is continuous. Here, a certain condition means that a certain condition is a system frame number (SFN _{start_time} ) and a subframe (when the uplink grant set in the terminal device 1 is initialized (or reinitialized). subframe _{start_time} ).

Immediately after the number of empty transmissions before the terminal device 1 is released to the consecutive MAC PDU (Protocol Data Unit) including zero MAC SDU (Service Data Unit) is given by multiplexing and configuring the entity And clear the configured uplink grant.

When the terminal device 1 supports the function of performing dual connectivity, the SPS may be performed not only in the primary cell but also in the primary secondary cell. That is, the SPS setting may be set not only for the primary cell but also for the primary secondary cell.

In the terminal device 1 that supports the function of performing dual connectivity, when only one SPS setting is set, the SPS may be applied only to the primary cell.

When only one SPS setting is set in the terminal device 1 that supports the function of performing dual connectivity, the same setting may be applied in the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.

In the terminal device 1 supporting the function of performing dual connectivity, the downlink SPS setting and / or the uplink SPS setting may be individually set for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. That is, the downlink SPS setting and / or the uplink SPS setting may be common to the primary cell and the primary secondary cell, or may be set individually. Whether or not to perform SPS in the downlink and / or uplink separately in the primary cell and the primary secondary cell may be determined based on the function information transmitted from the terminal device 1.

Hereinafter, PDCCH and EPDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell will be described.

The PDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell may be scrambled using parameters common to a plurality of terminal apparatuses and / or parameters defined in advance. In addition, when a common parameter is not set by a plurality of terminal apparatuses, it is scrambled using a physical cell identifier.

The PDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell may be cyclically shifted in units of REGs based on parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices and / or parameters defined in advance. In addition, when a common parameter is not set in a plurality of terminal apparatuses, cyclic shift is performed based on the value of the physical cell identifier.

In the primary secondary cell, a search space different from USS and USS is arranged. A search space different from USS is a search space for monitoring a common area in a plurality of terminal devices. The CSS arranged in the primary cell is also called a first CSS, and the search space different from the USS arranged in the primary secondary cell is also called a second CSS.

The second CSS is a search space set by using parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices and / or parameters defined in advance. Parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices are notified from an upper layer. As an example of parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices, parameters unique to the base station device 3 (cell, transmission point) are used. For example, a virtual cell identifier, TPID, or the like is used as a parameter specific to the transmission point. As an example of a parameter that is common to a plurality of terminal devices, a parameter that can be set individually for each terminal device, but a parameter that is set to a common value for a plurality of terminals. For example, RNTI or the like is used as a parameter for which a common value is set in a plurality of terminal devices.

The PDCCH may be arranged in the second CSS. In this case, in the second CSS, a CCE at which a search space is started is determined using a parameter common to a plurality of terminals and / or a parameter defined in advance. Specifically, a common RNTI (eg, UE-group-RNTI, CSS-RNTI) is set for a plurality of terminals as the initial value of Y _k used in equation (1) in FIG. Also, the CCE at which the second CSS search space is started may be designated in common by the higher layer parameters. Specifically, Y _k used in equation (1) in FIG. 14 is always a fixed value, and an upper layer parameter (for example, a parameter for designating a CCE index) is set. _Yk may always be set to 0.

The aggregation level of the second CSS arranged in the PDCCH supports 4 and 8. Also, at aggregation level 4, four PDCCH candidates are defined, and at aggregation level 8, two PDCCH candidates are defined. Note that

aggregation levels

1, 2, 16, and 32 may be supported. In this case, the blind decoding number is not increased in the second CSS by limiting the number of PDCCH candidates. For example, when 2, 4, and 8 are supported in the second CSS aggregation level, two PDCCH candidates are defined in each aggregation level.

The EPDCCH may be arranged in the second CSS. In this case, in the second CSS, the ECCE at which the search space is started is determined using a parameter common to a plurality of terminals and / or a parameter defined in advance. Specifically, an RNTI (for example, UE-group-RNTI, CSS-RNTI) common to a plurality of terminals is set as the initial value of Y _{p, k} used in Equation (2) in FIG. In addition, the ECCE at which the second CSS search space is started may be designated in common by the upper layer parameters. Specifically, Y _{p, k} used in equation (2) in FIG. 14 is always a fixed value, and an upper layer parameter (for example, a parameter for specifying an ECCE index) is set. Yp _{, k} may always be set to 0.

When EPDCCH is arranged in the second CSS, an EPDCCH set arranged in the second CSS may be set. For example, EPDCCH set 0 may be arranged in the USS, and EPDCCH set 1 may be arranged in the second CSS. Moreover, the inside of one EPDCCH set may be arrange | positioned at USS and 2nd CSS. For example, EPDCCH set 0 may be arranged in the USS and the second CSS.

The aggregation level of the second CSS in which the EPDCCH is arranged

supports

4 and 8. In addition, four EPDCCH candidates are defined in aggregation level 4, and two EPDCCH candidates are defined in aggregation level 8. Note that

aggregation levels

An example of the type of RNTI used for PDCCH monitoring in the second CSS will be described.

In the second CSS, at least a PDCCH for notifying a random access response, a PDCCH for instructing a TPC command to a specific terminal device 1, or a PDCCH for notifying a TDD UL / DL setting can be arranged. Moreover, when the delay of the backhaul between MeNB and SeNB is large, it is necessary to transmit from SeNB even at the time of RRC reset. That is, the terminal device 1 uses the second CSS using RA-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, TDD-ModeA-RNTI, C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, and Temporary C-RNTI. The PDCCH arranged in the

On the other hand, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which system information or information related to paging is allocated in the second CSS. Further, since the primary / secondary cell is used in the RRC connection mode, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which a downlink / uplink grant for transmission by a lower transmission scheme required at the time of RRC reconfiguration is allocated. That is, the terminal device 1 may not monitor the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using SI-RNTI and P-RNTI.

In the second CSS, at least a PDCCH for notifying a random access response, a PDCCH for instructing a TPC command to a specific terminal device 1, or a PDCCH for notifying a TDD UL / DL setting can be arranged. That is, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using at least RA-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, and TDD-ModeA-RNTI.

On the other hand, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which system information or information related to paging is allocated in the second CSS. Further, since the primary / secondary cell is used in the RRC connection mode, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which a downlink / uplink grant for transmission by a lower transmission scheme required at the time of RRC reconfiguration is allocated. That is, the terminal device 1 may not monitor the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS by using SI-RNTI, P-RNTI, C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, and Temporary C-RNTI.

In addition, you may arrange | position PDCCH containing the information which instruct | indicates the state of starting / stopping of a cell in 2nd CSS. That is, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using RNTI (SCE-RNTI) related to small cell on / off.

Due to the second CSS, the terminal device 1 increases the number of blind decoding in the primary secondary cell. Specifically, only the USS is arranged in the secondary cell, whereas both the USS and the second CSS are arranged in the primary secondary cell. If the blind decoding number of the second CSS is equal to the blind decoding number of the first CSS, the number of blind decoding increases 12 times, and the burden on the terminal device 1 increases.

An example of reduction in the number of blind decoding in the second CSS will be described.

If the PDCCH placed in the second CSS is not monitored using C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, or Temporary C-RNTI, the second CSS is not placed in the DCI format 0 / 1A. The number of blind decoding in CSS can be reduced.

At this time, the DCI format 3 / 3A is padded according to the payload size of the DCI format 1C. Alternatively, a new DCI format (DCI format 3B) for transmitting a TPC command is set.

DCI format 3B is used for transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH by 1-bit power adjustment. The terminal device 1 can detect the value of the transmission power control command corresponding to the PUSCH or the PUCCH by detecting the bit information corresponding to the index (TPC-Index) assigned to the own station. Also, in the DCI format 3B, it is determined whether a transmission power control command for PUSCH or a transmission power control command for PUCCH is indicated according to the type of scrambled RNTI. The DCI format 3B is padded according to the payload size of the DCI format 1C.

Thereby, since only the control information having the same payload size as that of the DCI format 1C is arranged in the second CSS, the number of blind decoding can be reduced. Specifically, in the second CSS, an attempt is made to decode six PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format in aggregation 4, and in aggregation 8 two PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format. Try to decode. That is, the terminal device 1 tries 6 times of decoding in the second CSS. Thereby, the number of blind decoding in CSS can be halved.

In the second CSS, padding bits are inserted until DCI format 1C has the same payload size as DCI format 0. Thereby, since only the control information having the same payload size as that of the DCI format 0 is arranged in the second CSS, the number of blind decoding can be reduced. Specifically, in the second CSS, an attempt is made to decode six PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format in aggregation 4, and in aggregation 8 two PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format. Try to decode. That is, the terminal device 1 tries 6 times of decoding in the second CSS. Thereby, the number of blind decoding in CSS can be halved.

From the viewpoint of increasing the number of blind decoding, it is not necessary for all the terminal devices 1 to support the monitoring of the second CSS. Therefore, the base station device 3 may be notified of information (capability) indicating the capability of whether or not the terminal device 1 can monitor the second CSS.

The terminal device 1 having a high processing capability notifies the base station device 3 of information indicating that the second CSS can be monitored. On the other hand, the terminal device 1 with a low processing capability notifies the base station device 3 of information indicating that the second CSS cannot be monitored. The base station device 3 obtains information indicating the capability of monitoring the second CSS from each terminal device 1, and only the terminal device 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS can receive the second CSS. 2 CSS is set. Here, the base station apparatus 3 may set the terminal apparatus 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS as a UE group.

For the terminal device 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS, the base station device 3 arranges the PDCCH in the second CSS and performs notification of a random access response, notification of TDD UL / DL setting, and the like. .

For the terminal device 1 that cannot monitor the second CSS, the base station device 3 arranges the PDCCH in the USS and performs notification of a random access response, notification of TDD UL / DL setting, and the like. At this time, from the viewpoint of the number of blind decoding, DCI format 1A is used for notification of random access response, and DCI format 1C used for notification of TDD UL / DL setting is padded to the same payload size as DCI format 0. .

Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the random access response, the notification of the TDD UL / DL setting, and the like even to the terminal device 1 having a low processing capability for which the second CSS cannot be monitored.

Note that the information indicating whether or not it is possible to monitor the second CSS may be notified in association with information indicating whether or not the operation can be performed in the dual connectivity mode. That is, the second CSS may be able to be monitored as long as the operation is possible in the dual connectivity mode.

The processing of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 when information indicating the activation / deactivation state for the secondary cell of the small cell is transmitted using the DCI format (PDCCH / EPDCCH with the DCI format) will be described. .

In a certain DCI format, 1 bit that indicates the activation / deactivation state of each of a plurality of cells (small cell, secondary cell, serving cell) may be set. For example, when the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state is composed of 15 bits, it may mean that the information indicating the start / stop state for 15 cells is included. That is, the start / stop state may be indicated by one bit. When the activation state is indicated by the 1 bit, it may be recognized as a CSI request for the cell corresponding to the 1 bit at the same time. When the activation status is indicated by the 1 bit, the CSI corresponding to the 1 bit is transmitted in the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe is received. Moreover, the position of the bit which comprises a DCI format, and a cell index (For example, a serving cell index, a small cell index, an on / off cell index, etc.) may be matched beforehand.

In the DCI format, only the activation state may be indicated. For example, “1” in one bit indicates activation, and “0” indicates the same state as the previous state. In this case, it is preferably used in combination with another method for instructing the stop state such as a deactivation timer.

In the DCI format, only the stop state may be indicated. For example, “1” in one bit indicates stop, and “0” indicates the same state as the previous state. In this case, it is preferably used in combination with another method for instructing the activation state such as activation notification by MAC CE.

In a certain DCI format, n bits indicating the activation / deactivation state of each of a plurality of cells (small cell, secondary cell, serving cell) may be set. For example, when the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state is composed of 15 bits, it may mean that the information indicating the start / stop state for 15 ÷ n cells is included. . That is, the start / stop state may be indicated by n bits. For example, the information notified by n bits is information on the activation / deactivation state of cells in n subframes. Each bit in n bits corresponds to a subframe. Specifically, the information notified in 8 bits is information indicating the start / stop state of 8 subframes. For example, the information notified by n bits is information indicating a subframe pattern in a start / stop state. The subframe pattern of the start / stop state may be determined in advance. The subframe pattern in the start / stop state may be notified in an upper layer. Specifically, the information notified with 2 bits indicates four types of subframe patterns. The length of the bit indicating the start / stop state is determined according to the maximum number of types of subframe patterns. The maximum number of types of subframe patterns may be set in an upper layer.

The PDCCH / EPDCCH including information indicating the start / stop state is scrambled by an RNTI (for example, SCE-RNTI) for indicating the start / stop state. When a certain PDCCH / EPDCCH is successfully decoded by the SCE-RNTI, the terminal device 1 recognizes that the information indicating the start / stop state is included in the PDCCH / EPDCCH. Thereby, even if the information indicating the start / stop state is included in the same DCI format as the other control information, the terminal device 1 can recognize that it is information for indicating the start / stop state.

It should be noted that information instructing the start / stop state for the secondary cell of the small cell may be included in the DCI including other control information scrambled by another RNTI. For example, the state of cell stop may be indicated using the state of UL / DL setting 7 in dynamic TDD. In other words, UL / DL settings 1 to 6 may indicate the activation status of the cell. Further, for example, a cell activation / deactivation state may be indicated using a surplus bit other than information indicating the UL / DL setting in dynamic TDD. Further, for example, the remaining bits other than the information for notifying the TPC command may be used to indicate the cell activation / deactivation state.

Note that the information indicating the activation state for the secondary cell may be notified by setting a field in the DCI format indicating the downlink grant / uplink grant. For example, a 3-bit field indicating a serving cell is set in DCI format 4 or DCI format 2D. The terminal device 1 recognizes that the serving cell indicated by the DCI format of the downlink grant / uplink grant is in the activated state.

Note that the information indicating the stop state for the secondary cell may be notified by setting a field in the DCI format indicating the downlink grant / uplink grant. For example, a 3-bit field indicating a serving cell is set in DCI format 4 or DCI format 2D. The terminal device 1 recognizes that the serving cell indicated by the DCI format of the downlink grant / uplink grant is in a stopped state.

In the DCI format including information indicating the start / stop state, it is preferable not to specify the start / stop state across a plurality of cell groups. For example, the information indicating the start / stop state corresponding to the secondary cell belonging to the master cell group and the information indicating the start / stop state corresponding to the secondary cell belonging to the secondary cell group are one DCI format. Not included. In other words, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state included in one DCI format corresponds only to the serving cell belonging to one cell group.

The DCI format including information indicating the start / stop state of the cells belonging to the master cell group is arranged in the first CSS of the primary cell. From the viewpoint of the processing burden of blind decoding, it is preferable that the DCI format including the information indicating the activation / deactivation state has the same number of bits as other DCI formats arranged in the first CSS. Specifically, in the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state, the bits are padded so that the payload size is the same as that of the DCI format 0 / 1A / 3 / 3A or the DCI format 1C. Located in CSS. The terminal device 1 monitors the CSS of the primary cell, and acquires the activation / deactivation state of a plurality of secondary cells (small cells) of the cell group to which the primary cell belongs in the DCI format. Thereby, it is easy to notify a plurality of terminal devices using one PDCCH, and overhead is reduced.

The DCI format including information instructing the start / stop state of the cells belonging to the secondary cell group is arranged in the SS of the primary secondary cell. The DCI format including information instructing the activation / deactivation state of cells belonging to the secondary cell group is preferably arranged in the SS that can be monitored by a plurality of terminal devices of the primary secondary cell. For example, a DCI format including information indicating the activation / deactivation state of a cell belonging to the secondary cell group is arranged in the second CSS. From the viewpoint of the processing burden of blind decoding, it is preferable that the DCI format including the information indicating the activation / deactivation state has the same number of bits as other DCI formats arranged in the second CSS. Specifically, in the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state, bits are padded so as to have the same payload size as the DCI format 0 / 1A / 3 / 3A or DCI format 1C and arranged in the CSS. Is done. The terminal device 1 monitors the second CSS of the primary secondary cell, and acquires the activation / deactivation state of a plurality of secondary cells (small cells) of the cell group to which the primary secondary cell belongs in the DCI format. Thereby, it becomes easy to notify a plurality of terminal devices using one PDCCH / EPDCCH, and overhead is reduced.

Note that a DCI format including information indicating the activation / deactivation state of a cell may be arranged in the USS of the cell. In this case, notification may be made with 1-bit information indicating the start / stop state.

The terminal device 1 may continue to recognize the start / stop state instructed in the previously transmitted DCI format until instructed in the next DCI format instructing the cell start / stop state. In this case, it is preferable that the DCI format instructing the cell activation / deactivation state is transmitted periodically. The cycle and timing (subframe) at which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted are notified to the terminal device 1. The cycle in which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted is, for example, one radio frame (10 subframes) or one half frame (5 subframes). The timing at which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted is, for example, subframe 0 or subframe 5. By periodically transmitting, the terminal device 1 can explicitly recognize the period for recognizing the start / stop state.

The terminal device 1 may be changed so as to be recognized as a stop state before being instructed by the next DCI format that indicates the start / stop state of the cell. In this case, for example, a timer (small cell deactivation timer) for transitioning to the stop state is set, and when the timer exceeds, the terminal device 1 is set to the stop state before receiving an instruction from the base station device 3. recognize.

Also, the start / stop state instruction for each cell (adjacent cell, transmission point) having a different transmission point from that of the serving cell may be performed in the DCI format. In this case, the serving cell and the cell having a different transmission point are preferably connected by a low-delay backhaul such as an optical fiber.

The on / off cell PDCCH configuration (on / off cell PDCCH configuration) is used to specify an RNTI and an index for indicating a start / stop state of a small cell (or a secondary cell / serving cell corresponding to the small cell). The small cell on / off function may be set up or released with this setting.

The on / off cell PDCCH setting may include an RNTI (eg, SCE-RNTI) indicating that the DCI format is a DCI format that indicates the activation / deactivation state of the small cell (serving cell). In addition, the on / off cell PDCCH setting may include a list of small cell indexes indicating activation / deactivation states in the DCI format. The list may notify a specific small cell of the activation / deactivation state. For example, when a certain DCI format is composed of 15 bits, the terminal apparatus 1 does not check the activation / deactivation state for all bits, but activates only the bits corresponding to the index indicated by the list. You may check the status of / stop. All other bits may be recognized as being in a stopped state.

When the terminal device 1 detects a DCI format including information indicating an activation state for a certain cell in a certain subframe i (i = 0, 1, 2,...), The subframe i + k (k is a predetermined value). Value) to recognize that the cell is activated. Similar processing may be performed for the stop state. Note that the value of k may be different between the activated state and the deactivated state.

When the first DCI format includes information indicating the start / stop state, the first DCI format size may be the same as the sizes of other DCI formats. By matching the size of the DCI format, new instruction information can be set without increasing the number of blind decoding. If the number (type) of control information to be transmitted and the number of necessary bits are different between the first DCI format and the second DCI format, bits that are not used as control information may be padded.

In addition, when information indicating the start / stop state is included in the first DCI format, bits other than the bits necessary for the information indicating the start / stop state may be deleted. That is, the first DCI format size may be increased or decreased as necessary.

When the activation state is instructed by the information indicating the activation / deactivation state, the terminal apparatus 1 performs CSI measurement for the cell in which the activation state is instructed, and the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe is performed. A CSI report may be performed in a frame.

When PDCCH / EPDCCH and DRS are transmitted in the same subframe, URS (or DMRS) may be transmitted in the same subframe in order to demodulate and decode PDCCH / EPDCCH.

When PDCCH / EPDCCH and DRS are transmitted in the same subframe, terminal apparatus 1 may perform demodulation / decoding of PDCCH / EPDCCH using DRS (one of a plurality of signals constituting DRS). Good.

When the DRS setting for a certain cell is set by higher layer signaling, the terminal apparatus 1 determines that the measurement result does not satisfy the threshold in a DRS measurement subframe for a certain cell, May be used to request resetting of the DRS.

Next, the implicit OFF state (implicit deactivation) of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

Note that the ON / OFF cell may be the same as the small cell.

When inter-cell interference is suppressed by transitioning the base station device 3 from the ON state (operating state, starting state) to the OFF state (stopping state) (for the sake of explanation, the base station device 3 is ON) It is assumed that the ON / OFF cell enters the OFF state before the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell set in the terminal device 1 expires. The

Note that the ON / OFF cell being in the OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 does not expect downlink transmission from the base station device 3. That is, at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and PDSCH may not be transmitted. For example, PSS / SSS is not transmitted for one half frame or more (5 subframes or more). For example, the base station device 3 being in the OFF state is a state in which only DRS is transmitted.

It should be noted that the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 performs a process different from that of the conventional terminal device. It may be in a state where processing similar to that of the apparatus is possible.

Note that, in the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 may perform uplink transmission such as PUCCH and PUSCH in the ON / OFF cell. That is, the ON / OFF cell may perform reception processing even in the OFF state.

Note that in the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 does not have to release (release or delete) information related to the ON / OFF cell. For example, in the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 holds information related to the ON / OFF cell, and stores information related to the ON / OFF cell when the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state. It may be used again.

The ON / OFF cell may be in the OFF state and the ON / OFF cell may be deactivated, and the deactivation of the ON / OFF cell is the same as the conventional deactivation (non-ON / OFF cell). Deactivation).

Note that the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state and the conventional deactivation may be executed simultaneously.

Each time the ON / OFF cell transitions from the ON state to the OFF state (the base station device 3 transitions from the activated state to the deactivated state), the base station device 3 performs L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE ) To notify the terminal device 1 of the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the control information overhead increases.

However, if the ON / OFF cell is not notified to the terminal device 1 every time the ON / OFF cell transitions from the ON state to the OFF state, the terminal device 1 is in the OFF state of the cell that has been turned OFF. Until the timer expires, an extra battery is consumed to perform operations such as monitoring of PDCCH in an ON / OFF cell that is in an OFF state.

Therefore, when the base station device 3 uses an ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 implicitly determines (assumes) the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, and determines (assumes) the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state. The terminal device 1 implicitly recognizes it as being in an OFF state (implicit deactivation), or shifts to an operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state in an ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) as an OFF state. It is effective. For example, the operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state may be an operation assuming that at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and PDSCH is not transmitted. Good. For example, the operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 performs processing different from that of a conventional terminal device. For example, the operation in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state may be an operation in which the terminal device 1 performs only uplink transmission such as PUCCH and PUSCH.

Note that the terminal device 1 may receive information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell from the base station device 3. That is, the base station device 3 may transmit information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell to the terminal device 1.

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

The terminal device 1 reports CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for ON / OFF cells in which the ON state is set. That is, when the ON / OFF cell transitions from the ON state to the OFF state, the OFF state timer of the ON / OFF cell is notified until the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell expires or by the base station device 3 Until it is done, information related to the calculation of CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is measured in the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state.

In the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state, the terminal device 1 measures information related to the calculation of CQI (Channel QualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator). In some cases, reference signals (CRS, CSI-RS, DRS, etc.) used for transmission are not transmitted. That is, when calculating CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for an ON / OFF cell in which the terminal device 1 is in an OFF state, a specific CQI ( There is a high possibility of calculating Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator). Therefore, the terminal device 1 performs specific CQI (Channel QualityatorIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) a predetermined number of times in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. When the above calculation is performed, it is determined (assumed) that the reference signal is not transmitted in the ON / OFF cell, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (in the OFF state). The operation moves to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell).

For example, when the predetermined number of times “out of range (outside the allowable range)” is calculated, or when the predetermined number of times “out of range (outside the allowable range)” is calculated in a predetermined number of subframes, Alternatively, when “out of range” is calculated continuously for a predetermined number of times, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as an OFF state (ON / OFF of the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) The operation may be shifted to communication with a cell).

Note that the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

DRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state. In the ON / OFF cell, when the DRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, or when the received power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, It is determined (assumed) that the DRS is not transmitted, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)

For example, when the predetermined number of times DRS is not detected, or when the predetermined number of times DRS is not detected in a predetermined number of subframes, or when the predetermined number of times DRS is not continuously detected, the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).

The case where the RS is not detected is a case where the average power of the RE to which the RS is mapped does not exceed the threshold value. Note that the RE for calculating the power may be averaged over a plurality of subframes. The REs that calculate power may be averaged only in specific subframes. Note that the RE for calculating the power is averaged over some resource blocks of the system bandwidth and may not be averaged over some resource blocks.

Note that a subframe in which part or all of the RS does not exist is notified to the terminal device 1. The terminal device 1 does not include in the average of the power calculated for the RE in which no RS exists in a subframe in which some or all of the terminal devices 1 do not exist.

In addition, when DRS is not detected, you may determine based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.

In addition, when DRS is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that DRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

Also, a DRS pattern indicating the ON state and a DRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be defined independently, and when the DRS pattern indicating the OFF state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the OFF state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS using different DRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

CRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state. In the ON / OFF cell, when the CRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the CRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, CRS is not transmitted, that is, it is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)

For example, when a predetermined number of CRSs are not detected, or when a predetermined number of CRSs are not detected in a predetermined number of subframes, or when a predetermined number of CRSs are not continuously detected, the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).

In addition, when CRS is not detected, you may determine based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.

In addition, when CRS is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that CRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

Also, the CRS pattern indicating the ON state and the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be independently defined, and when the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the OFF state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit CRS using different CRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

The terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH / EPDCCH in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. The terminal apparatus 1 determines (assumes) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state when PDCCH / EPDCCH is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, The ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state). That is, when the terminal device 1 does not detect PDCCH / EPDCCH continuously for a predetermined number of subframes or more in the search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, the base station device 3 It is determined (assumed) that the cell is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state (the operation shifts to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state). That is, the base station device 3 does not arrange the PDCCH / EPDCCH in the search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set.

Note that the predetermined number of subframes in which the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

In addition, when PDCCH / EPDCCH is not detected, it may be determined that no error is detected by cyclic redundancy check (CRC: “Cyclic Redundancy Check”) or that the average received power of a subframe is compared with a predetermined threshold. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

In the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, the terminal device 1 has a downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set or an uplink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. If PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating (uplink grant) is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more, it is determined (assumed) that the base station device 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state ( The operation proceeds to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

In the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, the terminal device 1 is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set or the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. If the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the uplink grant (uplink grant) is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more, it is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state. (The operation shifts to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell). That is, the terminal device 1 is a search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, and the downlink grant (downlink grant) or the ON state for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in an OFF state when PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell for which is set is not detected continuously for a predetermined number of subframes or more, The ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state). That is, the base station apparatus 3 is a search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, and the downlink grant (downlink grant) or ON for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. A PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell in which the state is set is not arranged.

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

The terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the OFF state when discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) is set for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. The / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state (the operation shifts to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state).

In addition, when the parameter regarding the short DRX is set, the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and preferably does not recognize the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state (the ON It is preferable not to shift to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell).

Note that discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for ON / OFF cells may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.

Note that a timer related to the duration of intermittent reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for an ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.

An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

The PHICH is not transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state (HARQ indicator indicating ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) transmitted by the terminal device 1. (HARQ feedback, response information) may not be transmitted). The terminal device 1 does not detect PHICH in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set (ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) transmitted by the terminal device 1) Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell). The operation shifts to the case of communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in FIG.

For example, when a predetermined number of times PHICH is not detected, or when a predetermined number of times PHICH is not detected in a predetermined number of subframes, or when a predetermined number of times PHICH is not detected, the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).

In addition, when PHICH is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that PHICH is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

Note that the above example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell is not limited to being executed separately, and two or more may be executed at the same time. It may be executed at the same time as the activation.

Note that the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) that is in the OFF state (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state) is the wireless that is determined (assumed) as being in the OFF state. It may be applied from a frame and / or subframe, or may be applied after a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number of subframes from a radio frame and / or subframe determined (assumed) to be in an OFF state. Good.

Note that the predetermined number of radio frames until the application of the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) in the OFF state (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state) / or the predetermined number The number of subframes may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.

Next, the implicit ON state (implicit activation) of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

Note that the ON state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as a conventional terminal device. A specific example of the base station device 3 in the ON state is as follows. The terminal device 1 expects to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH. The terminal device 1 monitors PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in a predetermined subframe. The terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting based on the set CSI reporting mode. The terminal apparatus 1 expects a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) for CSI reporting and a CSI reference resource to exist.

In the ON state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 may use again the information related to the ON / OFF cell that was held in the OFF state.

Note that it may be the same that the ON / OFF cell is turned on and the ON / OFF cell is activated, and the activation of the ON / OFF cell is the same as the conventional activation (non-ON / OFF cell). Activation).

Note that the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state and the conventional activation may be executed simultaneously.

Each time the ON / OFF cell transitions from the OFF state to the ON state (the base station device 3 transitions from the stopped state to the activated state), the base station device 3 performs L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE ) To notify the terminal device 1 of the ON / OFF cell ON state, the overhead of the control information increases.

Therefore, when the base station apparatus 3 uses the ON / OFF cell, the terminal apparatus 1 implicitly determines (assumes) the ON state of the ON / OFF cell, and the ON / OFF cell that is determined (assumed) as the ON state. It is effective that the terminal device 1 implicitly turns on (implicit activation) or shifts to an operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in the ON state. For example, the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state is an operation in which the terminal device 1 uses again the information related to the ON / OFF cell that the ON / OFF cell has held in the OFF state. May be. For example, the operation in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state may be an operation in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as the conventional terminal device.

An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

In an ON / OFF cell that is in an OFF state, a DRS may not be transmitted, that is, a DRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in an ON state. When the DRS is detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, or when the received power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted exceeds the threshold value, the terminal device 1 is the ON / OFF cell. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF of the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to operation when communicating with a cell).

In addition, when DRS is detected, you may determine based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.

In addition, when DRS is detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that DRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

In addition, a DRS pattern indicating an ON state and a DRS pattern indicating an OFF state may be defined independently, and when a DRS pattern indicating an ON state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as an ON state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS using different DRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.

An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

The DRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the ON state, that is, the DRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state. In the ON / OFF cell, when the DRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, It is determined (assumed) that the DRS is not transmitted, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)

An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

In the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state, the CRS may not be transmitted, that is, the CRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state. When the CRS is detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the CRS is transmitted exceeds the threshold value, the terminal device 1 is the ON / OFF cell. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF of the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to operation when communicating with a cell).

In addition, when CRS is detected, it may be determined based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.

In addition, when CRS is detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that CRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.

Also, the CRS pattern indicating the ON state and the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be independently defined, and when the CRS pattern indicating the ON state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the ON state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit CRS using different CRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.

An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

In the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the terminal device 1 is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set. When the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the uplink grant (uplink grant) is detected, it is determined (assumed) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (the ON / OFF The operation proceeds to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the OFF cell).

In addition, in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set It is preferable that the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the grant (uplink grant) is not arranged in the search space based on the carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier Indicator Field) related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set (the ON state is It is preferably arranged in a search space based on a carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier Indicator Field) associated with the set cell).

In addition, in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set The PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating a grant is preferably CRC masked with an RNTI related to an ON / OFF cell in which an OFF state is set.

In addition, in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set The PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating a grant is preferably a payload size including bit information related to a carrier indicator field (CIF) related to an ON / OFF cell in which an OFF state is set.

An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

The terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state when a timer related to discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set expires, The ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the ON state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state).

An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.

When the timer related to the short DRX for the ON / OFF cell for which the OFF state is set expires, the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and turns on the ON / OFF cell. It recognizes as a state (it moves to the operation | movement in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell of an ON state in this ON / OFF cell).

The short DRX for the ON / OFF cell may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.

Note that the timer related to the duration of the short DRX for the ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.

The example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell is not limited to being executed separately, and two or more may be executed at the same time. It may be executed at the same time as the activation.

Note that the ON state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) that is in the ON state (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state) is the wireless that is determined (assumed) as being in the ON state. It may be applied from a frame and / or subframe, or may be applied after a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number of subframes from a radio frame and / or subframe determined (assumed to be in an ON state) Good.

It should be noted that the predetermined number of radio frames until the ON state of the ON / OFF cell determined to be in the ON state (assumed) (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state) is applied. The number of subframes may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.

Note that the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 has a predetermined function (capability, UEabilityCapability).

Note that the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 is in a predetermined mode. For example, when the Implicit / Explicit activation mode is defined, the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 is the Implicit mode. The switching of the Implicit / Explicit activation mode is preferably notified using the R field reserved in the MAC CE, and when the R field is set to “0”, the explicit activation mode is indicated, and the R field is When set to “1”, it is preferable to indicate the Implicit activation mode.

Next, the ON / OFF cell OFF state timer (OFF timer, small cell deactivation timer) will be described.

When receiving the ON state instruction of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.

When the PDCCH in the ON / OFF cell does not indicate a downlink grant (uplink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell (Downlink grant) or the uplink grant for the ON / OFF cell (uplink grant) is not indicated, or if there is no PDCCH instruction for the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 is turned OFF related to the ON / OFF cell. Count up the state timer (advance by 1 and add 1). When the OFF state timer is in units of radio frames, the count is incremented when there is no PDCCH instruction in all predetermined radio frames. When the OFF state timer is a unit of a plurality of subframes, it is counted up when there is no PDCCH instruction in all of the plurality of subframes.

Note that the OFF state timer may be counted up only in a specific subframe. In other words, the OFF state timer is not counted up except for a specific subframe. For example, in the uplink subframe, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied. For example, in the MBSFN subframe, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied. For example, in the subframe indicated by the higher layer, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied.

When the OFF state timer associated with the ON / OFF cell expires, the terminal device 1 recognizes the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state.

When the PDCCH in the ON / OFF cell indicates a downlink grant (downlink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell is a downlink grant ( In the case of indicating a downlink grant or an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts an OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.

When receiving an OFF state instruction of an ON / OFF cell, or when an OFF state timer associated with the ON / OFF cell expires, the terminal device 1 displays an OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell. Stop.

In addition, the OFF state timer of the ON / OFF cell may be the same as the deactivation timer (timer related to the cell maintenance time). That is, the ON / OFF cell OFF state timer may be a timer related to the ON / OFF cell maintenance time.

When suppressing inter-cell interference using an ON / OFF cell, the ON / OFF cell is dynamically switched between the ON state and the OFF state according to the position of the terminal device 1 and the traffic volume. And the adaptability to the position and traffic volume of the terminal device 1 becomes higher as the switching between the ON state and the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell becomes faster.

The ON / OFF cell and / or the non-ON / OFF cell may be set as the primary cell, may be set as the secondary cell, or has a special function (for example, the function of the primary cell) in the secondary cell. ) May be set to a secondary cell (primary secondary cell, special cell).

Note that the ON state may be always set for the ON / OFF cell and / or the non-ON / OFF cell.

That is, it is preferable that the ON / OFF cell and the non-ON / OFF cell are maintained independently in the terminal device 1. That is, it is preferable that the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell are set independently.

An example of setting the initial value of the OFF state timer will be described.

The initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set from the upper layer (RRC layer) using the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12, and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is set to the upper layer (RRC). Layer) to parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.

The initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set using two or more of the same parameters. For example, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set using two or more parameters sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.

The parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 related to the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is replaced with the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell, and the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell An initial value may be set. For example, when rf2, which is a value related to the number of radio frames, is set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell may be set as rf1.

The parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 related to the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set as the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.

It should be noted that at least one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which are values related to the number of radio frames, is preferably set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10. Here, rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames, rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames, rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames, rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames, and rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames. Correspondingly, rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames and rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.

Note that the value related to the number of radio frames set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 may be selected from different values. For example, at least one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which are values related to the number of radio frames, is set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10, and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 is set in the radio frame It is preferable that at least one of rf1, rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, and rf64, which is a value related to the number of. Here, rf1 corresponds to 1 radio frame, rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames, rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames, rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames, and rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames. Correspondingly, rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames, rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames, and rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.

Note that the value set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and / or the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 may be selected from values related to the number of subframes.

The initial value of the OFF state timer may be applied from a radio frame and / or subframe that has received the setting, or a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number from the radio frame and / or subframe that has received the setting. It may be applied after the number of subframes.

When the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set for the terminal device 1 for which the initial value of the first OFF state timer is set, the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set. It may be applied from the received radio frame and / or subframe, or the setting of the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set to a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined subframe from the received radio frame and / or subframe. It may be applied several times later, or the initial value of the second OFF state timer may be ignored.

Note that the predetermined number of radio frames / or the predetermined number of subframes to which the initial value of the OFF state timer is applied may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.

Note that the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell may be set using the upper layer (RRC layer).

In addition, you may set the initial value of the OFF state timer relevant to an ON / OFF cell using L1 signaling (for example, DCI format). For example, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set using L1 signaling (eg, DCI format), and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is set to the upper layer (RRC layer). ) May be used.

In addition, when a plurality of ON / OFF cells are set in the terminal device 1, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set to a common value for the set ON / OFF cells. Alternatively, individual values may be set for each of a plurality of set ON / OFF cells, or a plurality of set ON / OFF cells may be grouped to be a common value for the group. May be set.

Hereinafter, details of CSI measurement and CSI report of the terminal device 1 will be described.

The CSI is configured by CQI (Channel quality indicator), PMI (Precoding matrix indicator), PTI (Precoding type indicator) and / or RI (Rank indicator). RI indicates the number of transmission layers (number of ranks). PMI is information indicating a precoding matrix defined in advance. The PMI indicates one precoding matrix by one piece of information or two pieces of information. The PMI in the case of using two pieces of information is also referred to as a first PMI and a second PMI. CQI is information indicating a combination of a modulation scheme and a coding rate defined in advance. The recommended CSI is reported to the base station apparatus 3. The terminal device 2 reports a CQI that satisfies a predetermined reception quality for each transport block (codeword).

Subframes (reporting instances) capable of periodic CSI reporting are determined by the reporting period and subframe offset based on information (CQIPMI index, RI index) set in an upper layer. Note that information set in the upper layer can be set for each subframe set set for measuring CSI. When only one information is set for a plurality of subframe sets, the information may be regarded as common between the subframe sets.

For the terminal device 2 set in the transmission modes 1 to 9, one P-CSI report for each serving cell is set by higher layer signaling.

For the terminal device 2 set in the transmission mode 10, one or more P-CSI reports for each serving cell are set by higher layer signaling.

A parameter (PUCCH_format1-1_CSI_reporting_mode) in which an 8CSI-RS port is set for the terminal device 2 set in the

transmission mode

9 or 10 and the single PMI reporting mode (mode 1-1) is set by the higher layer signaling in the wideband CQI. ) To set submode 1 or submode 2.

For terminal-selected subband CQI (UE-selected） subband CQI), the CQI report in a subframe of a serving cell indicates the channel quality in a specific part (part) of the serving cell bandwidth indicated as the bandwidth part. It is a report.

The CSI report type supports the PUCCH CSI report mode. The CSI report type may be referred to as PUCCH reporting type (PUCCH reporting type). Type 1 reporting supports CQI feedback for terminal selection subbands. Type 1a reporting supports subband CQI and a second PMI feed bank. Type 2, type 2b, and type 2c reports support wideband CQI and PMI feedback. Type 2a reports support wideband PMI feedbanks. Type 3 reports support RI feedback. Type 4 reports support wideband CQI. Type 5 reports support RI and wideband PMI feedback. Type 6 reports support RI and PTI feedback.

Hereinafter, details of CSI measurement and CSI report of the terminal device 1 in the base station device 3 that supports the ON state and the OFF state will be described.

The terminal device 1 is set with information related to CSI measurement and CSI reporting from the base station device 3. CSI measurements are made based on reference signals and / or reference resources (eg, CRS, CSI-RS, CSI-IM resources, and / or DRS). The reference signal used for CSI measurement is determined based on transmission mode settings and the like. CSI measurement is performed based on channel measurement and interference measurement. For example, channel measurement measures the power of a desired cell. Interference measurement measures power other than the desired cell and noise power.

As an example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on CRS. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on CSI-RS, and performs interference measurement based on CRS. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on CSI-RS, and performs interference measurement based on CSI-IM resources. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on DRS.

The terminal device 1 can perform CSI measurement in consideration of the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3. For example, the terminal device 1 can consider the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3 with respect to the reference signal and / or reference resource for performing CSI measurement. In the following description, the reference signal in CSI measurement includes a reference resource. In particular, a reference signal for interference measurement can be read as a resource referred to for interference measurement. That is, the signal for interference measurement does not have to be mapped. Therefore, whether the resource for interference measurement is valid or invalid can be determined according to the ON state and the OFF state of the base station apparatus 3.

As an example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement only when the base station device 3 is ON, and transmits a reference signal for interference measurement only when the base station device 3 is ON. Assume that That is, the terminal device 1 transmits the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose The terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for CSI measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state.

As another example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement only when the base station device 3 is in an ON state, and the reference signal for interference measurement is an ON state of the base station device 3 and Assume that it is transmitted in the OFF state. That is, the terminal device 1 transmits the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose The terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the reference signal for interference measurement is transmitted in the ON frame and the OFF state subframe of the base station apparatus 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe of the frame. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for channel measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform interference measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in interference measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.

As another example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement when the base station device 3 is in an ON state and an OFF state, and a reference signal for interference measurement is the ON signal of the base station device 3. Assume that it is sent only in the state. That is, terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a reference signal for channel measurement is transmitted in subframes of base station apparatus 3 in the ON state and the OFF state. The terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state, and the substation in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe of the frame. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for the interference measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform channel measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in channel measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.

As another example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement when the base station device 3 is in an ON state and an OFF state, and a reference signal for interference measurement is the ON signal of the base station device 3. Suppose that it is sent in state and off state. That is, terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a reference signal for channel measurement is transmitted in subframes of base station apparatus 3 in the ON state and the OFF state. The terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the reference signal for interference measurement is transmitted in the ON frame and the OFF state subframe of the base station apparatus 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state, and the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among subframes in a state. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can perform CSI measurement in the terminal apparatus 1 even when transmission of signals and channels other than the reference is stopped in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform CSI measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in interference measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.

Hereinafter, specific examples of reference signals for channel measurement and interference measurement will be described.

In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The channel measurement is based only on non-zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of CSI-RS resources associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, the RRC parameter related to the ON state and the OFF state is set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the CSI-RS within the ON state subframe is set. Resources are used to make that channel measurement.

In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The channel measurement is based only on non-zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of CSI-RS resources associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the sub-frame within the ON state and the OFF state CSI-RS resources are used to make that channel measurement.

In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs interference measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The interference measurement is based only on the zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of the CSI-IM resource associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, a CSI subframe set is set by an upper layer for the terminal device 1 set in the predetermined transmission mode, a CSI-IM within a subset of subframes belonging to the CSI reference resource Resources are used to make that interference measurement. If, in the CSI process, the RRC parameter related to the ON state and the OFF state is set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the CSI-RS within the ON state subframe is set. Resources are used to make that interference measurement.

In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs interference measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The interference measurement is based only on the zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of the CSI-IM resource associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, a CSI subframe set is set by an upper layer for the terminal device 1 set in the predetermined transmission mode, a CSI-IM within a subset of subframes belonging to the CSI reference resource Resources are used to make that interference measurement. If, in the CSI process, RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the sub-frame within the ON state and the OFF state CSI-RS resources are used to make the interference measurements.

In the description of the present embodiment, RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set in the upper layer. The setting of the RRC parameter regarding the ON state and the OFF state is also referred to as setting for cell state information. The setting for cell state information is used for cell state information that is explicitly or implicitly notified in the physical layer. For example, the configuration for cell state information includes information necessary for receiving cell state information that is explicitly or implicitly notified in the physical layer. The settings for cell state information can be set individually for each CSI process. The setting for cell state information can be individually set for each CSI subframe set.

The CSI process is set as information unique to the terminal device 1 in the upper layer. The terminal device 1 is set with one or more CSI processes, and performs CSI measurement and CSI reporting based on the settings of the CSI processes. For example, when a plurality of CSI processes are set, the terminal device 1 independently reports a plurality of CSIs based on those CSI processes. Each CSI process is configured for cell state information, CSI process identifier, CSI-RS configuration information, CSI-IM configuration information, subframe pattern configured for CSI report, and periodic CSI report. And / or configuration information regarding aperiodic CSI reporting. Note that the settings for cell state information may be common to multiple CSI processes.

Hereinafter, details of CSI reference resources in a serving cell will be described.

The CSI reference resource is a resource used for the terminal device 1 to perform CSI measurement. For example, the terminal device 1 measures the CSI when the PDSCH is transmitted using the group of downlink physical resource blocks indicated by the CSI reference resource. When the CSI subframe set is configured in an upper layer, each CSI reference resource belongs to one of the CSI subframe sets and does not belong to both of the CSI subframe sets.

In the frequency direction, a CSI reference resource is defined by a group of downlink physical resource blocks corresponding to a band related to a required CQI value.

In the layer direction (spatial direction), the CSI reference resource is defined by RI and PMI on which the required CQI is conditional. In other words, in the layer direction (spatial direction), the CSI reference resource is defined by the RI and PMI assumed or generated when obtaining the CQI.

In the time direction, the CSI reference resource is defined by one predetermined downlink subframe. Specifically, the CSI reference resource is defined by a subframe that is a predetermined number of subframes before the subframe that reports CSI. The predetermined number of subframes defining the CSI reference resource is determined based on the transmission mode, the frame configuration type, the number of CSI processes to be configured, and / or the CSI reporting mode. For example, when one CSI process and a periodic CSI report mode are set for the terminal device 1, the predetermined number of subframes defining the CSI reference resource is 4 out of valid downlink subframes. This is the minimum value.

In the following, details of valid downlink subframes will be described.

A downlink subframe in a certain serving cell is considered to be effective when some or all of the following conditions apply. As one of the conditions, an effective downlink subframe is an ON state subframe in the terminal device 1 in which RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is set as a downlink subframe in the terminal device 1. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is not an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) subframe in a predetermined transmission mode. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is not included in the range of the measurement interval (measurement） gap) set in the terminal device 1. As one of the conditions, the effective downlink subframe is an element of the CSI subframe set linked to the periodic CSI report when the CSI subframe set is set in the terminal device 1 in the periodic CSI report. Or part. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is a CSI subframe set linked to a downlink subframe with a corresponding CSI request in the uplink DCI format in an aperiodic CSI report for the CSI process. It is an element or part. Under the conditions, a predetermined transmission mode, a plurality of CSI processes, and a CSI subframe set for the CSI process are set in the terminal device 1.

Also, when there is no valid downlink subframe for the CSI reference resource in a certain serving cell, the CSI report in that serving cell is excluded in the corresponding uplink subframe. That is, when it is a condition that a valid downlink subframe is a subframe in an ON state, the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a subframe in an OFF state is not a valid downlink subframe.

In addition, when the base station device 3 (serving cell) is in the OFF state, the terminal device 1 assumes that all subframes including the previous ON state subframe are not valid downlink subframes. Also good. That is, when the base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) is in the OFF state, the terminal apparatus 1 determines that the effective downlink subframe is a predetermined subframe after the subframe in which the ON state is notified or the ON state is notified thereafter. Are assumed to be subframes of

Also, even if the subframe is in an OFF state, the terminal device 1 may use a condition for being a valid downlink subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 may determine whether or not it is a valid downlink subframe regardless of the subframe in the ON state or the OFF state.

Also, the terminal device 1 may use conditions for the subframes in the ON state and some subframes in the OFF state to be valid downlink subframes. Some subframes in the OFF state are predetermined subframes defined in advance, predetermined subframes set specifically for the base station apparatus 3, or subframes set specific to the terminal apparatus 1. For example, some subframes in the OFF state are subframes between a predetermined subframe and a predetermined number of subframes before the predetermined subframe. For example, the predetermined subframe is a subframe that is in the ON state or a subframe that has notified the ON state. The predetermined subframe is a subframe that has received the DCI format including the CSI request. The predetermined subframe is a subframe for CSI reporting.

Hereinafter, a specific example of the cell state (ON state or OFF state) notification method of the base station apparatus 3 will be described.

The base station apparatus 3 performs settings related to cell state information for the terminal apparatus 1 through RRC signaling. The base station device 3 notifies the cell state by a predetermined method based on the setting related to the cell state information set in the terminal device 1. The terminal apparatus 1 is set with respect to cell state information from the base station apparatus 3 through RRC signaling. The terminal device 1 recognizes the cell state by a predetermined method based on the setting related to the cell state information set from the base station device 3.

The method for notifying the cell state is an explicit method or an implicit method. As an example, the cell state is explicitly notified based on cell state information notified using DCI transmitted by PDCCH or EPDCCH. For example, the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state when the cell state information indicates 1 and is in the OFF state when the cell state information indicates 0. As another example, the cell state is notified implicitly based on the presence or absence of a reference signal. The presence or absence of the reference signal is determined by comparing the reception power or reception level of the reference signal with a predetermined threshold value. As another example, cell status is reported implicitly based on DRX configuration or procedure. For example, the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state during the non-DRX period and is in the OFF state during the DRX period. As another example, the cell state is notified implicitly based on cell activation (Activation) or deactivation (Deactivation) notified in the MAC layer. For example, the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state during the cell activation period and is in the OFF state during the cell activation period.

The setting related to the cell state information is information used for the terminal device 1 to recognize the cell state. For example, the setting related to cell state information includes subframe information, information related to search space, information related to RNTI, and the like as information used to receive or monitor PDCCH or EPDCCH for which cell state information is notified. The setting related to the cell state information includes information related to the reference signal, a virtual cell identifier, a predetermined threshold, subframe information, and the like as information used to recognize the presence or absence of the reference signal.

Hereinafter, details of the recognition of the cell state notification in the terminal device 1 will be described.

As an example, the terminal apparatus 1 recognizes the cell state notification based on a cyclic redundancy check (CCR) added to the PDCCH or EPDCCH including the DCI that notifies the cell state information. For example, when the value obtained by the cyclic redundancy check is not correct, the terminal device 1 determines that the notification of the cell state has not been recognized (detected).

As another example, the notification of the cell state notification in the terminal device 1 is performed based on whether the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is within a predetermined threshold range. For example, a first threshold value and a second threshold value greater than the first threshold value are defined or set, and the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is changed from the first threshold value to the second threshold value. If it is within the range up to the threshold value, the terminal device 1 determines that the notification of the cell state could not be recognized (detected). Further, when the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is lower than the first threshold value, it is determined that the terminal device 1 is in the OFF state. When the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is higher than the second threshold value, it is determined that the terminal device 1 is in the ON state.

Hereinafter, a process (operation) when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the notification of the cell state will be described.

As an example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is assumed to be in the OFF state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. . That is, the terminal device 1 performs the same process as when the OFF state is notified until the next subframe where the notification of the next cell state is performed.

As an example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is assumed to be in the ON state until the subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. . That is, the terminal device 1 performs the same processing as when the ON state is notified until the subframe where the next cell state notification is performed.

As an example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is in the ON state or the OFF state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. Assume different states. That is, the terminal device 1 performs a process different from the case where the ON state or the OFF state is notified until the next subframe where the notification of the next cell state is performed.

For example, in a subframe that is different from the ON state or the OFF state, the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the downlink subframe is in the ON state and the uplink subframe is in the OFF state. That is, the terminal device 1 receives or monitors a part or all of the downlink signals and / or channels, and does not transmit part or all of the uplink signals and / or channels. For example, the terminal device 1 performs reception of a reference signal, PDCCH monitoring, and / or EPDCCH monitoring, and does not perform periodic CSI reporting and / or SRS transmission.

For example, in a subframe that is different from the ON state or the OFF state, the terminal device 1 assumes that the downlink subframe is in the OFF state and the uplink subframe is in the ON state. That is, the terminal device 1 does not receive or monitor a part or all of the downlink signals and / or channels, and transmits part or all of the uplink signals and / or channels. For example, the terminal device 1 does not receive the reference signal, monitor the PDCCH, and / or monitor the EPDCCH, and performs periodic CSI report and / or SRS transmission.

For example, in a subframe that is in a state different from the ON state or the OFF state, the terminal device 1 monitors a predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH that is different from the ON state. The predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH is monitored in a predetermined search space different from the ON state. A CRC scrambled with a predetermined RNTI different from the ON state is added to the predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH.

In the above description, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is in a predetermined state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 remains in a predetermined state until the subframe to which the cell state indicated by the next cell state notification is applied. You may assume that there is. Thereby, the subframe in which the cell state is notified and the subframe to which the cell state indicated by the notification is applied can be defined or set independently.

The various methods, procedures, settings, and / or processes described in the present embodiment may be independent between the Pcell and the pScell in dual connectivity.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing uplink CoMP (ul-CoMP).

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function (supportedBandCombination, supportedBandListEUTRA) for performing a band combination (CA, non-CA).

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing cross carrier scheduling (crossCarrierScheduling).

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a plurality of timing advance functions (multipleTimingAdvance).

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support the function of the CSI process.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using cells (plural cells) having different TDD UL-DL settings.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing eIMTA.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using a small cell.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function (dual-connectivity) for performing communication simultaneously with a plurality of base station devices.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using cells (a plurality of cells) of different frame structure types.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support the function of simultaneously transmitting and receiving.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of receiving the EPDCCH.

The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may transmit information (UE-EUTRA-capability or FeatureGroupIndicator) indicating the supported function to the base station device 3.

In the above embodiment, the PDCCH subframe may be defined not only as a subframe accompanied by PDCCH, but also as a subframe accompanied by EPDCCH (Enhanced PDCCH) or R-PDCCH (Relay-PDCCH).

According to the details of the above embodiment, transmission efficiency can be improved in the wireless communication system in which the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 communicate.

A program that operates in the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 related to the present invention is a program that controls a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or the like (a computer is functioned) so as to realize the functions of the above-described embodiments related to the present invention Program). Information handled by these devices is temporarily stored in RAM (Random Access Memory) during processing, and then stored in various ROMs such as Flash ROM (Read Only Memory) and HDD (Hard Disk Drive). Reading, correction, and writing are performed by the CPU as necessary.

Note that the terminal device 1 and a part of the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may be realized by a computer. In that case, the program for realizing the control function may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium may be read by the computer system and executed.

The “computer system” here is a computer system built in the terminal device 1 or the base station device 3 and includes hardware such as an OS and peripheral devices. The “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a storage device such as a flexible medium, a magneto-optical disk, a portable medium such as a ROM or a CD-ROM, and a hard disk incorporated in a computer system.

Furthermore, the “computer-readable recording medium” is a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, such as a communication line when transmitting a program via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line, In such a case, a volatile memory inside a computer system serving as a server or a client may be included and a program that holds a program for a certain period of time. The program may be a program for realizing a part of the functions described above, and may be a program capable of realizing the functions described above in combination with a program already recorded in a computer system.

Also, the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment can be realized as an aggregate (device group) composed of a plurality of devices. Each of the devices constituting the device group may include a part or all of each function or each functional block of the base station device 3 according to the above-described embodiment. The device group only needs to have one function or each function block of the base station device 3. The terminal device 1 according to the above-described embodiment can also communicate with the base station device 3 as an aggregate.

Further, the base station apparatus 3 in the above-described embodiment may be EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network). In addition, the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may have a part or all of the functions of the upper node for the eNodeB.

In addition, a part or all of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may be realized as an LSI that is typically an integrated circuit, or may be realized as a chip set. Each functional block of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 may be individually chipped, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a chip. Further, the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. In addition, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces LSI appears due to progress in semiconductor technology, an integrated circuit based on the technology can also be used.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal device is described as an example of the terminal device or the communication device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a stationary type or a non-movable type installed indoors and outdoors. The present invention can also be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as electronic devices such as AV devices, kitchen devices, cleaning / washing devices, air conditioning devices, office devices, vending machines, and other daily life devices.

As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and includes design changes and the like without departing from the gist of the present invention. The present invention can be modified in various ways within the scope of the claims, and embodiments obtained by appropriately combining technical means disclosed in different embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. Moreover, it is the element described in each said embodiment, and the structure which substituted the element which has the same effect is also contained.

One embodiment of the present invention can be applied to a terminal device that can efficiently communicate in a communication system in which a base station device and a terminal device communicate.

1 (1A, 1B, 1C) Terminal apparatus 3 Base station apparatus 101 Upper layer processing section 103 Control section 105 Reception section 107 Transmission section 301 Upper layer processing section 303 Control section 305 Reception section 307 Transmission section 1011 Radio resource control section 1013 Subframe Setting unit 1015 Scheduling information interpretation unit 1017 CSI report control unit 3011 Radio resource control unit 3013 Subframe setting unit 3015 Scheduling unit 3017 CSI report control unit 1301 Measurement unit 13011 First layer filtering unit 13012 Third layer filtering unit 13013 Evaluation of report criteria Part

Claims

At least the first serving cell group and the second serving cell group are aggregated,
When detecting the first physical downlink control channel in the first serving cell group, receiving the first physical downlink shared channel allocated by the first physical downlink control channel;
When a second physical downlink control channel is detected in the second serving cell group, a second physical downlink shared channel assigned by the second physical downlink control channel is received,
Whether the data received via the first physical downlink shared channel is a retransmission of the data received via the second physical downlink shared channel is determined based on the first physical downlink control channel. A terminal device based on a predetermined field.
If it is determined to be a retransmission based on the predetermined field, the reception of data via the first physical downlink shared channel is transmitted to the HARQ process of the HARQ entity for the second serving cell group. The terminal device according to claim 1.
The terminal device according to claim 2, wherein information indicating a serving cell index of the second serving cell group is set in the predetermined field.
The terminal device according to claim 1, wherein information indicating a serving cell index of an arbitrary serving cell group set in the terminal device is set in the predetermined field.
If it is determined to be a retransmission based on the predetermined field, the reception of data via the first physical downlink shared channel is related to a HARQ process of a HARQ entity for the arbitrary serving cell group. The terminal device according to claim 4.
The terminal apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the first serving cell group includes at least one unlicensed band cell.
The terminal device according to claim 1, wherein the first serving cell group includes at least one licensed band cell and at least one unlicensed band cell.
At least the first serving cell group and the second serving cell group are aggregated,
When transmitting the first physical downlink control channel in the first serving cell group, transmitting the first physical downlink shared channel allocated by the first physical downlink control channel,
When the second physical downlink control channel is transmitted in the second serving cell group, the second physical downlink shared channel assigned by the second physical downlink control channel is transmitted,
Whether the data transmitted through the first physical downlink shared channel is a retransmission of the data transmitted through the second physical downlink shared channel is determined by the first physical downlink control channel. Base station apparatus based on a predetermined field.
If it is determined to be retransmission based on the predetermined field, the transmission of data via the first physical downlink shared channel is transmitted to the HARQ process of the HARQ entity for the second serving cell group. Related The base station apparatus of Claim 8.
The base station apparatus according to claim 9, wherein information indicating a serving cell index of the second serving cell group is set in the predetermined field.
The base station apparatus according to claim 8, wherein information indicating a serving cell index of an arbitrary serving cell group set in the terminal apparatus is set in the predetermined field.
If it is determined to be a retransmission based on the predetermined field, the transmission of data via the first physical downlink shared channel is related to the HARQ process of the HARQ entity for the arbitrary serving cell group. The base station apparatus according to claim 11.
The base station apparatus according to claim 8, wherein at least one unlicensed band cell belongs to the first serving cell group.
The base station apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the first serving cell group includes at least one licensed band cell and at least one unlicensed band cell.